Contents

Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 PDF

1 of 304
1 of 304

Summary of Content for Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 PDF

2016 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY

OWNERS MANUAL

2 0 1 6 N

IS S

A N

G T -R

M U

L T I F

U N

C T IO

N D

IS P

L A

Y

R 3 5 -N

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle

R35-N

Printing: December 2014 (19) Publication No.:

Printed In U.S.A. NA16E 0R35U0

1849817-EN_GTR_Navi-cover.indd 1 12/17/14 11:12 AM

(4,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 5 Model: R35-N ]

NISSAN NAVIGATION SYSTEM HELPDESK CONTACT INFORMA- TION For assistance or inquiries about the NISSAN Navigation System, or to order updated map data, contact the NISSAN NAVIGATION SYS- TEM HELPDESK at:

. ADDRESS: P.O. Box 1588, Orem, UT

84059-992

. WEB SITE: www.NissanNavigation.com or

www.nissan.ca

. PHONE: 1-888-661-9995

. HOURS: 6:00 AM to 5:00 PM

(Pacific Time)

NISSAN CONSUMER AFFAIRS DE- PARTMENT For assistance or inquiries about the NISSAN warranty, service or general questions, contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

1-800-387-0122

Thank you for purchasing a NISSAN vehicle.

This users manual is for the multi function display system only. This manual contains operating instructions for the NISSAN Multi Function Display System offered in your NISSAN vehicle.

Please read this manual carefully to ensure safe operation of the navigation system.

. Because of possible specification changes and optional equipment, sections of this manual may not apply to your vehicle.

. All information, specifications and illustra- tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

. Do not remove this manual from the vehicle when selling this vehicle. The next user of this multi function display system may need the manual.

FOREWORD

Condition: Language=NAM_English/ 1849817-EN_GTR_Navi-cover.indd 2 12/17/14 11:12 AM

(1,1)

Introduction 0

About Multi function display system 1

Navigation

Audio system

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System

Heater and air conditioner

Viewing technical information

Other settings

Voice recognition

Monitor system

Multi function meter

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Table of Contents

General system information 11

Troubleshooting guide 12

Index 13

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(2,1)

(5,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

0 Introduction

How to use this manual ........................................................... 0-2

For safe operation................................................................ 0-2

Reference symbols .............................................................. 0-2

Safety information ..................................................................... 0-2

Functions disabled while driving.................................... 0-4

Laser product............................................................................. 0-5

Trademarks.................................................................................. 0-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(6,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

0-2 Introduction

This manual uses special words, symbols and

icons, organized by function.

Please refer to the following items and familiarize

yourself with them.

FOR SAFE OPERATION

WARNING

This is used to indicate a hazard that

could cause death or serious personal

injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,

follow the information and instructions

exactly.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate a hazard that

could cause minor or moderate perso-

nal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,

follow the information and instructions

carefully.

NOTICE

This is used to indicate a hazard that

could cause damage to your vehicle. To

avoid or reduce the risk, follow the

information and instructions.

REFERENCE SYMBOLS

INFO:

This indicates information that is necessary for

efficient use of your vehicle or accessories.

Reference page:

This indicates the title and page that you should

refer to.

<>:

This indicates a button on the control panel.

[ ]:

This indicates a key/item displayed on the

screen.

Voice Command:

This indicates an operation by voice command.

This system is primarily designed to help you

reach your destination, and it also performs

other functions as outlined in this manual.

However, you, the driver, must use the system

safely and properly. Information concerning road

conditions, traffic signs and the availability of

services may not always be up-to-date. The

system is not a substitute for safe, proper and

legal driving.

Before using the navigation system, please read

the following safety information. Always use the

system as outlined in this manual.

WARNING

. When the driver wants to operate

the navigation system or use the

center dial, first park the vehicle in a

safe location and set the parking

brake. Operating the system while

driving can distract the driver and

may result in a serious accident.

. Do not rely on route guidance alone.

Always be sure that all driving

maneuvers are legal and safe in

order to avoid accidents.

. Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire or electrical shock.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL SAFETY INFORMATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(7,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. If you notice any foreign objects in

the system hardware, spill liquid on

the system or notice smoke or a

smell coming from it, stop using the

system immediately and contact a

GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Ignor-

ing such conditions may lead to

accidents, fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION

. Do not use this system if you notice

any malfunctions such as a frozen

screen or the lack of sound. Con-

tinued use of the system may result

in accidents, fire or electrical shock.

. Some jurisdictions may have laws

limiting the use of video screens

while driving. Use this system only

where it is legal to do so.

. Extreme temperature conditions

[below 48F (208C) and above

1588F (708C)] could affect the per-

formance of the system.

NOTICE

Do not keep the navigation system

running with the engine stopped. Doing

so may discharge the vehicle battery.

When you use the navigation system,

always keep the engine running.

Introduction 0-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(8,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

0-4 Introduction

FUNCTIONS DISABLED WHILE DRIVING To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot

be operated or have limited operation when the

vehicle driving speed is above 5 MPH (8 km/h).

The on-screen text and keys for these restricted

functions will be grayed-out or muted and

cannot be selected while driving. In some cases,

a screen message will appear indicating a

restricted function.

Restricted functions while driving include:

. Character (letter and number) input screen

during destination entry (street address,

phone number, freeway entrance/exit, inter-

section, city center)

. Places search by name and city name

. Scrolling and viewing of certain navigation

lists

. Adding/editing address book entries

. Adding/editing home location

. Storing current position, information, desti-

nations

These functions will become available again

when the vehicle speed is reduced to 5 MPH (8

km/h).

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(9,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Destination functions available while driving

include:

. Home

. Address Book

. Previous Destinations

. Previous Start Point

. Stored Routes

. Delete Destination

. Map input

This system is certified as a Class 1 laser

product.

The system complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR

Chapter 1, Subchapter J.

WARNING

. Do not disassemble or modify this

system. There are no user service-

able parts in this system.

. If maintenance, adjustments and

operations other than those speci-

fied in this manual are attempted,

injury due to laser radiation and

exposure could occur.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires subscription,

sold separately. Not available in Alaska, Hawaii

or Guam. For more information, visit www.

siriusxm.com.

Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio and NavTraf-

fic monthly subscriptions are sold separately.

NavTraffic are only available in select markets.

For more information,

see www.siriusxm.com/navtraffic.

Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio and Nav-

WeatherXM monthly subscriptions are sold

separately. NavWeatherXM is only available in

select markets. For more information,

see www.siriusxm.com/navweather.

Introduction 0-5

LASER PRODUCT TRADEMARKS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(10,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

0-6 Introduction

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(11,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1 About Multi function display system

Features of multi function display system ........................... 1-2

Navigation system................................................................ 1-2

Multi function meter............................................................. 1-2

Control buttons and functions................................................ 1-4

Control panel ........................................................................ 1-4

Digital media slots ............................................................... 1-7

Steering switch..................................................................... 1-8

Start-up screen .......................................................................... 1-9

Basic operation....................................................................... 1-10

Menu screen and how to operate.............................. 1-10

List screen ........................................................................ 1-12

Touch panel operation .......................................................... 1-13

Example of touch panel operation.............................. 1-13

How to input letters and numbers..................................... 1-14

Character (letters and numbers) input screen........ 1-14

Number input screen ..................................................... 1-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(12,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-2 About Multi function display system

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Contained within NISSANs authentic navigation

system, the navigation and audio systems are all

available for use.

Navigation screen

Audio screen

Information screen

Available items:

. Navigation function

2. Navigation

. Audio

3. Audio system

. Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

4. Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System

. Heater/air conditioner

5. Heater and air conditioner

. Vehicle information/Traffic information

6. Viewing technical information

. System setting

7. Other settings

. Voice recognition

8. Voice recognition

. RearView Monitor

9. Monitor system

MULTI FUNCTION METER

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Operating the multi function meter

while driving can lead to a crash

resulting in serious injuries or

death. Always park the vehicle in a

safe place before operating the dis-

play screen.

. Look at the display screen only

briefly while driving. Keep your eyes

on the road. Inattentive driving may

lead to a crash resulting in serious

injuries or death.

FEATURES OF MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(13,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Performance and vehicle informa- tion

Drivers can customize the panel by choosing up

to six information gauges for the information they

would like displayed.

Custom view screen (page 10-6)

Custom view screen (three panels)

Custom view screen (six panels)

Vehicle information items:

. Engine coolant temperature

. Engine oil temperature

. Engine oil pressure

. Transmission oil pressure

. Transmission oil temperature

. Boost

. etc.

Trip calculator

This allows you to record your driving time and

waypoints. It also displays the history for both

functions.

Stopwatch screen

Available items:

. Stopwatch screen

Time log

Speed

Elapsed time

Stopwatch screen (page 10-22)

About Multi function display system 1-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(14,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-4 About Multi function display system

CONTROL PANEL

Navigation, Multi function meter

&1 Monitor:

Multi function screens appear here.

&2 :

Push to access the phone settings.

&3 :

Push to access the system settings.

&4 :

Push to display the vehicle information and the

navigation information, such as GPS and version

information, etc.

&5 :

Push to enter a destination. Various methods for

entering a destination are available.

&6 VOICE>:

Push to access guidance control functions

(guidance cancellation, route priority, waypoint

settings on the route, etc.).

&7 :

Push to display the current location map screen.

&8 :

Push to display the multi function meter screen.

&9 :

Push to return to the previous screen. In a

settings screen, this button can also be used to

apply the setting. In a character input screen, this

button can also delete the characters that have

been entered.

&10 Center dial/:

Turn to highlight an item on the screen or adjust a

setting. Push to select the highlighted item on the

screen. Use the center dial to adjust the map

scale. If this button is pushed while a map is

displayed, the map menu screen is displayed.

&11 < OFF> (DAY/NIGHT):

Push to switch between the day screen (bright)

and the night screen (dark). Push and hold to turn

off the display. Push again to turn on the display.

&12 :

Push to display the current status of the air

conditioner, radio, audio, vehicle information

(drivable distance and average fuel economy)

and navigation systems.

CONTROL BUTTONS AND FUNCTIONS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(15,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Audio system

&1 / AUDIO>:

Turn this switch to manually tune the radio

frequency. Push the switch to configure the

sound settings. When using CD (including

MP3/WMA/AAC files on disk)/DVD/USB de-

vice/Bluetooth streaming audio/iPod player

you can change the album or folder to be played.

&2 Preset stations <1>-<6>:

Use these buttons to toggle between the stations

preset in the system. Pushing and holding any of

the preset station buttons will save the station

you are listening to.

&3 / ONOFF> :

Turn this switch to adjust the volume of the

stereo. Push this switch to turn the audio system

ON or OFF.

&4 :

Push to switch between CD/DVD/USB device/

Bluetooth streaming audio/iPod player/AUX (if

so equipped) screens.

&5 < >:

Push to search for a track/station automatically or

to fast-forward when listening to music.

&6 < >:

Push to search for a track/station automatically or

to rewind when listening to music.

&7 :

Push to switch to an SiriusXM satellite radio

band.

&8 RPT>:

Push to switch from the random mode to repeat

mode while listening to music.

&9 :

Push to tune the radio from low to high

frequencies. The radio will stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. When operating

the CD player, push to preview the first 5

seconds of each CD track.

&10 :

Push to switch to a different radio band.

About Multi function display system 1-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(16,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-6 About Multi function display system

Heater and air conditioner

&1 AUTO>:

Push this to set the air conditioner to the

automatic mode. Turn the switch to adjust the

cabin temperature. When in dual mode, this

switch adjusts the driver-side temperature.

&2 < >:

Push this to recirculate the air in the cabin.

&3

:

When the fan is ON, pushing this button turns the

air conditioner ON/OFF.

&4 < >:

Push to turn the front defroster ON/OFF.

&5 OFF>/< >:

Turning this switch turns the fan ON. This switch

also controls the fan speed. Push the switch to

turn the fan OFF.

&6 < >:

Push to ventilate fresh air into the cabin.

&7 :

Push to select between dashboard or feet air

ventilators.

&8 < REAR>:

Push to turn the rear defroster ON/OFF.

&9 DUAL>:

Push this to turn the dual temperature mode ON/

OFF. Turn the switch to the left or right to adjust

the passenger-side temperature.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(17,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

DIGITAL MEDIA SLOTS

&1 CD/DVD slot:

Insert a CD/DVD.

&2 :

Push to eject a CD/DVD.

&3 USB connection port:

Connect to play an iPod or a USB device.

About Multi function display system 1-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(18,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-8 About Multi function display system

STEERING SWITCH

&1 :

Push the source select switch to change the

mode to available audio source. If they are not

ready to function, those modes will be skipped.

&2 :

Allows you to adjust the audio volume.

&3 :

This can be used when operating the audio

system. Push the seek button to select a radio

station or a song. Push and hold the seek button

and the system will automatically select a station

folder or disc.

&4 < >:

Push to enter voice recognition mode.

&5 < >:

Push to display the hands-free phone operation

screen.

&6 :

When using the stopwatch, push this button to

record the required travel time. When Drivers

Notes is active, pushing this will record your

present position as a waypoint.

&7 :

Push to start/stop the timer on the Stopwatch

screen or the Drivers Notes screen (when

displayed).

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(19,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1. The navigation system starts when the

ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or

ON position.

INFO:

. After the engine is started, the operation

instructions will only be displayed the first

time the screen is displayed.

. The operations instruction screen will dis-

appear automatically after a few seconds or

when you start to operate the screen.

. The system saves the screen displayed at

the time the engine is turned off.

. Clarion logo is a registered trademark of

Clarion Co., Ltd. and the POLYPHONY

DIGITAL logo is a registered trademark of

Polyphony Digital Corporation.

About Multi function display system 1-9

START-UP SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(20,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-10 About Multi function display system

MENU SCREEN AND HOW TO OP- ERATE

Menu screens and their purposes

P u s h , VOICE> ,

, or to dis-

play the corresponding menu screen.

How to select a menu item:

Example: screen

1. Turn the center dial clockwise or counter-

clockwise. An item is highlighted accord-

ingly.

2. To select the preferred menu item, highlight

the item and push . The next

screen is displayed.

3. Push to return to the previous

screen without applying any changes.

Push to return to the current

location map screen without applying any

changes.

INFO:

Depending on the menu selected, pushing

may not return you to the current

location map screen.

BASIC OPERATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(21,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Using controls to adjust values, levels, etc.

There are two main methods you can use to

control the navigation system: the center dial or

the touch panel. Use these controls to adjust the

volume of phone and voice guidance, the display

brightness, etc.

How to adjust:

1. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push . The color of the corre-

sponding adjustment item changes.

2. Use the center dial or the touch panel, and

the value or bar indicating levels increases

or decreases accordingly.

3. Push or to apply the

setting.

INFO:

. This same adjustment can also be made by

the touch panel operation.

List screen (page 1-12)

About Multi function display system 1-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(22,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-12 About Multi function display system

LIST SCREEN

After searching for a point of interest, a list

screen is displayed.

Depending on the list displayed, it can be

sorted.

Items displayed in list

*1 Highlight the preferred item from the list and push

to select it. If a location or facility

name is not completely displayed (due to length),

highlight the item to display the hidden part of the

name.

*2 Distance from the current location

*3 Direction to the point of interest

*4 If the entire list cannot be displayed on the

screen, the system displays the total number of

items in the list and the entry number of the

selected item. Turn the center dial to scroll the

list.

*5 An item that starts with the selected letter will be

displayed at the top of the list.

*6 Highlight and push to sort the list in

the original order.

*7 When the list is sorted by the shortest distance,

the selected location can be confirmed in the

preview displayed on the right side of the screen.

*8 Highlight and push to modify the

search conditions.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(23,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

With this system, it is possible to use the center

dial and touch panel operation to perform the

same operations.

This section describes the operations using the

center dial.

For the operations that differ from those of the

center dial and for useful methods for using the

touch panel operation, refer to each section.

EXAMPLE OF TOUCH PANEL OP- ERATION

Examples of operations performed using the

touch panel operation are described here.

Selecting item

When the item is touched, the next screen is

displayed.

Adjusting volume and others

Touch [+] or [] located on the right and left of

the bar graph to perform the adjustment.

Scrolling message or list

Touch [ ] or [ ] to scroll the message or list.

Touch [ ] or [ ] to skip to the next page.

Inputting letters and numbers

1. Touch the letter or number.

2. Touch [Delete] to delete a character. Push

and hold [Delete] to delete all of the

characters.

About Multi function display system 1-13

TOUCH PANEL OPERATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(24,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-14 About Multi function display system

CHARACTER (letters and numbers) INPUT SCREEN

Alphanumeric characters are entered to set a

destination, search for a facility, edit stored

locations, etc.

1. Use the touch panel or center dial to

highlight a character on the displayed key-

board.

2. Push . The highlighted character

is entered.

3. Push , or highlight [Delete] and

push to delete the last character

entered.

Push and hold to delete all the

characters entered.

Highlight [Space] and push to

enter a space.

4. After finishing the entry, highlight [List] and

push .

INFO:

. Push on the control panel to

return to the previous screen, but only

after deleting all the characters entered.

. Touch [BACK] on the screen to return to

the previous screen even when charac-

ters have been entered.

. The list screen appears automatically

when text has been entered and the

matching list items have been narrowed

down to a number that will fit on the

screen.

Symbol input screen . Symbol keys are displayed by highlighting

[Symbols] and pushing . Al-

phabet keys are displayed by highlighting

[A-Z] and pushing .

HOW TO INPUT LETTERS AND NUMBERS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(25,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

NUMBER INPUT SCREEN

A phone number or a street number can also be

entered as a search method to look for a

destination. Perform the following procedure to

enter a number.

INFO:

Only the locations included in the map data

database can be searched for by a phone

number.

1. Use the touch panel or center dial to

highlight a number on the displayed key-

board.

2. Push . The highlighted number is

entered.

3. Push , or highlight [Delete] and

push to delete the last number

entered.

Push and hold to delete all the

numbers entered.

4. After finishing the entry, highlight [List] and

push .

INFO:

. Push on the control panel to

return to the previous screen, but only after

deleting all the numbers entered.

. Touch [BACK] on the screen to return to the

previous screen even when numbers have

been entered.

About Multi function display system 1-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(26,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1-16 About Multi function display system

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(27,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2 Navigation

Features of this navigation system........................................ 2-3

Route guidance .................................................................... 2-3

Places of interest (Places) directory ............................... 2-3

Address book........................................................................ 2-3

Avoid area.............................................................................. 2-3

XM NavTraffic information ............................................... 2-3

Automatic reroute ................................................................ 2-4

Detour ..................................................................................... 2-4

BirdviewTM ............................................................................. 2-4

Voice guidance ..................................................................... 2-4

Map settings ............................................................................... 2-5

Map types .............................................................................. 2-5

BirdviewTM (3D) map .......................................................... 2-6

Building graphics ................................................................. 2-6

Displaying current vehicle location.................................. 2-7

Moving map........................................................................... 2-7

Changing scale of map ...................................................... 2-9

Changing map view.......................................................... 2-11

Map view settings............................................................. 2-13

Looking at information on map...................................... 2-17

Map menu screen ............................................................. 2-19

Map symbols ...................................................................... 2-22

Setting destination................................................................. 2-23

Destination screen.......................................................... 2-23

Finding address............................................................... 2-25

Finding place ................................................................... 2-27

Setting home as destination ........................................ 2-32

Searching from address book ..................................... 2-33

Setting previous destination ........................................ 2-34

Setting previous start point.......................................... 2-35

Setting from stored routes ........................................... 2-36

Setting by phone number ............................................. 2-37

Setting freeway entrance/exit ...................................... 2-38

Setting intersection ........................................................ 2-39

Setting city center .......................................................... 2-41

Setting point on map ..................................................... 2-42

Delete destination........................................................... 2-43

Route guidance ...................................................................... 2-44

Procedures after setting destination.......................... 2-44

About route guidance.................................................... 2-48

Route screen ................................................................... 2-53

Route guidance settings............................................... 2-67

Storing a location/route........................................................ 2-70

Storing location ............................................................... 2-70

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(28,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Storing route ...................................................................... 2-73

Storing tracked route ....................................................... 2-74

Storing avoid area ............................................................ 2-75

Editing address book....................................................... 2-77

Deleting stored item......................................................... 2-86

Transferring information to/from address book ......... 2-89

Navigation setting .................................................................. 2-91

Basic operation ............................................................... 2-91

Speed limit indication on map..................................... 2-92

Other navigation settings.............................................. 2-92

Delete stored items........................................................ 2-96

Reset all navigation settings to default ..................... 2-96

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(29,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

ROUTE GUIDANCE

The main features of the NISSAN Navigation

System are visual guidance and voice guidance

in selected map coverage areas. Utilizing a

network of GPS (Global Positioning System)

satellites, the NISSAN Navigation System tracks

the location on the map and navigates to a

preferred location.

Once the destination is set in a map coverage

area, the NISSAN Navigation System will

calculate a route from the current location to

the destination. The real-time map display and

turn-by-turn voice guidance leads the driver

along the route. These features can be espe-

cially helpful when driving to unfamiliar locations.

The system may be unable to set a destination

and/or calculate a route when the destination is

outside the map coverage area. Additionally,

voice guidance may not be available if the

destination is outside the map coverage area.

For more information on how to set a destina-

tion, refer to section 4.

PLACES OF INTEREST (Places) DI- RECTORY

The NISSAN Navigation System offers an

extensive places of interest (Places) directory

in map coverage areas. This directory includes a

wide variety of destinations ranging from gas

stations, ATMs, and restaurants to casinos, ski

resorts, shopping centers and businesses. A

point of interest can be searched by category,

name or phone number. After selecting a

destination, the NISSAN Navigation System will

calculate a route to that destination.

The Places directory has many uses. For

example, the directory can be sorted by the

various types of restaurants near the current

location. If an ATM or gas station is needed, the

NISSAN Navigation System can navigate to the

closest preferred location.

For more information on how to use the Places

directory, refer to section 4.

ADDRESS BOOK

The Address Book can store up to 300 locations

from map coverage areas into a personal

directory. This is especially useful for frequently

visited locations, such as clients, relatives and

friends. The Address Book function allows easy

access to frequently visited locations when

setting them as your destination.

For more information on how to use the Address

Book, refer to section 6.

AVOID AREA

The Avoid Area function sets areas or freeways

that the NISSAN Navigation System does not

include in the suggested route when calculating

routes. For example, if a freeway or area that is

always congested with traffic.

For more information on the Avoid Area function,

refer to section 6.

XM NavTraffic INFORMATION

When available, the NavTraffic Information

broadcast may help to avoid delays due to

traffic incidents. Traffic jams, roadwork, closed

roads around the current location, etc. are

represented graphically on the map by icons

depicting the nature of the event. Incidents on

the route are automatically brought to the

attention when they are approached.

The NavTraffic Information feature, via the

guidance mode, may help to detour around

traffic problems. For more information on the

NavTraffic Information feature, refer to section 6.

Navigation 2-3

FEATURES OF THIS NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(30,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-4 Navigation

AUTOMATIC REROUTE

When detecting a deviation from the suggested

route, the NISSAN Navigation System will

automatically recalculate a new route to the

destination.

For more information on the Automatic reroute

function, refer to section 2.

DETOUR

To make a detour due to traffic conditions, the

Detour function calculates an alternative route.

The NISSAN Navigation System can calculate a

route using secondary roads that will return to

primary roads after a specified number of miles.

For more information on the Detour function,

refer to section 2.

BirdviewTM

Two map types, the 2D (Plan View) map and

BirdviewTM (3D) map, are available in the

NISSAN Navigation System. BirdviewTM map

displays the map from an elevated perspective.

In BirdviewTM map, it is easy to recognize an

image of the route because it provides a

panoramic view over a long distance.

For more information on BirdviewTM map, refer

to section 2.

VOICE GUIDANCE

Route guidance is provided through voice and

visual instructions. Voice guidance announces

the appropriate directions when approaching an

intersection to turn.

For more information on voice guidance, refer to

section 2.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(31,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

MAP TYPES

Two types of map views are available: 2D map

and BirdviewTM (3D) map.

2D map

The 2D map displays the map in a 2-dimensional

environment similar to a road map.

Screen information:

*1 Vehicle icon:

Indicates the current vehicle location and the

direction of travel.

*2 Guide point:

Indicates a guide point on the route.

*3 Remaining time and distance to the

destination:

Indicates the approximate remaining time and

distance to the destination or waypoint. This

indicator will appear when a destination or

waypoint is set and route guidance is started.

When the vehicle is not driven on the suggested

route, the screen displays the direction to the

destination and the distance to the destination

from the current vehicle position.

Switching estimated arrival time display

(page 2-69)

*4 Suggested route:

Appears in bold yellow during route guidance.

*5 / Direction indicator:

Indicates the directional setting of the map.

Touch the icon to change the setting.

: North always pointing up.

: Direction of the vehicle always pointing up.

Setting map orientation (page 2-14)

*6 Scale indicator:

Indicates the scale of the map. Touch the icon to

display the scale bar.

The map scale can be adjusted using the scale

bar.

Operating with touch panel operation

(page 2-7)

*7 Arrow:

Indicates the distance to the next guide point and

the turning direction at that guide point.

*8 Stored location (orange):

Displays the locations that are stored in the

Address Book. Icons can be changed according

to personal preferences.

Storing location (page 2-70)

*9 Avoid Area (green or blue):

Displays the areas to avoid that are stored in the

Address Book with green or blue icons. During

Navigation 2-5

MAP SETTINGS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(32,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-6 Navigation

the route search, the route guidance is performed

by searching for a route that avoids those areas.

Storing avoid area (page 2-75)

*10 Street name:

Displays the name of the street the vehicle is

currently driving on.

*11 Traffic indicator:

Displays the reception condition of the traffic

information transmitted from the provider.

Green: Reception condition is good.

Gray: Reception condition is not good.

No mark: Subscription to NavTraffic service is not

detected.

BirdviewTM (3D) MAP

BirdviewTM displays the map from an elevated

perspective. In BirdviewTM, it is easy to recog-

nize an image of the route because it provides a

panoramic view over a long distance.

INFO:

Note the following items about the BirdviewTM

display.

. BirdviewTM is a registered trademark of

Clarion Co., Ltd.

. The map in BirdviewTM always appears with

the current forward direction facing up.

BUILDING GRAPHICS

In an area where the building graphics are

stored in the map data, the building graphics are

displayed when the map is zoomed in. On the

2D map display, these are called Building

footprint graphics, and on the BirdviewTM

display, these are called 3D building graphics.

The method to look at the map is the same for

the 2D and BirdviewTM maps.

Building footprint graphics (2D map)

3D building graphics (BirdviewTM map)

INFO:

In an area where the building graphics are not

stored in the map data, the normal map is

displayed even when the map is zoomed in.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(33,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

DISPLAYING CURRENT VEHICLE LOCATION

Operating with control panel

The basic map screen displays the current

location (the position where the vehicle mark is

located). Push to display the current

location on the map while on any screen.

Operating with touch panel opera- tion

After moving the map, touch [BACK] on the map

screen to display the current location map

screen.

MOVING MAP

The operations for moving across the map are

different between the 2D and BirdviewTM maps.

2D map

1. Touch the screen.

The cross pointer is displayed, and the

touched position is set as the center of the

screen.

Navigation 2-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(34,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-8 Navigation

2. Touch the direction to move to. The map

continues to scroll while the screen is

touched.

INFO:

While driving, scrolling on the map is limited to a

specified distance.

If the map screen is set to the building footprint

graphics, the map cannot be scrolled while

driving.

Fine-tuning the cursor position:

1. Touch [Slow].

The 8-directional key is displayed.

2. Touch the 8-directional key to adjust the

cross pointer position. Touch [BACK] to

complete the adjustment.

INFO:

Fine-tuning the cursor position is not possible

while driving.

BirdviewTM (3D) map

1. Touch the screen.

The cross pointer and 8-directional key are

displayed.

2. Touch the direction to move to. The map

continues to scroll while the screen is

touched.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(35,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. Touch [ ] or [ ] to change the direction of

the map.

: Rotates the map clockwise.

: Rotates the map counterclockwise.

INFO:

While driving, scrolling on the map is limited to a

specified distance.

CHANGING SCALE OF MAP

Operating with center dial

1. Turn the center dial when the map screen is

displayed. The map scale is displayed at the

right side of the screen.

2. Use the center dial to adjust the map scale.

&1 Clockwise: Zoom in

&2 Counterclockwise: Zoom out

INFO:

Free zoom:

Depending on the setting, using the center dial

to change the map scale may adjust the scale

normally, or it may engage the free zoom (finer

scale adjustment in smaller steps).

Other navigation settings (page 2-92)

Navigation 2-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(36,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-10 Navigation

Operating with touch panel opera- tion

1. Touch [ ].

The scale is displayed.

2. Touch [ZOOM IN] or [ZOOM OUT] to

change the scale.

INFO:

Free zoom:

Once the [Small Step Zoom by Dial] is set to ON

in the setting screen, the scale can be changed

in smaller steps when [ZOOM IN] or [ZOOM

OUT] is pushed and held than when either

button is briefly pushed.

If briefly pushed, the operation returns to normal.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To change the map scale:

Zoom In <1 to 14> (Alternate Command

Mode)

Zoom Out <1 to 14> (Alternate Command

Mode)

Map scale

Any required map scale (map coverage) be-

tween 320 miles (640 km) and 1/64 of a mile

(25 m) can be selected.

Scale level for 2D map and BirdviewTM map

(3D) display:

Normal Map

US Units Metric Units

320 miles 640 km

80 miles 160 km

32 miles 64 km

8 miles 16 km

5 miles 10 km

2 miles 4 km

1 mile 2 km

1/2 mile 1 km

1/4 mile 500 m

1/8 mile 200 m

1/16 mile 100 m

1/32 mile 50 m

Shows build- ing footprint

graphics

1/32 mile 50 m

1/64 mile 25 m

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(37,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Example: The most detailed level (2D map)

Example: The widest level (2D map)

Example: The most detailed level (BirdviewTM map)

Example: The widest level (BirdviewTM map)

INFO:

The traffic information icons are not displayed on

the map screen when the map scale is set to 32

miles (64 km) or higher.

Traffic information display and scale le-

vels (page 6-11)

CHANGING MAP VIEW

The map view can be changed between the 2D

and BirdviewTM maps. The map can also be

displayed in the split screen mode.

1. Push while the current location

map screen is displayed.

2. Highlight [Map View] and push .

Navigation 2-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(38,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-12 Navigation

3. Highlight [Change View] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred map view and push

. The indicator of the selected

map view illuminates.

5. The display automatically returns to the map

screen.

Available views

. [2D Map]:

Switches to the 2D map.

. [Birdview (3D)]:

Switches to the BirdviewTM map.

. [Split: 2D Map]:

Changes to the split screen mode and both

halves display maps in 2D.

. [Split: Birdview Map]:

Changes to the split screen mode and the

left half displays the map in 2D and the right

half displays the map in BirdviewTM.

INFO:

. When the split screen mode is selected, the

map settings for the left screen can be

changed independently.

Setting left screen display

(page 2-16)

. If the split screen mode is selected, the

normal map scrolling and scale adjustment

are set in the right screen. However, if an

icon is touched before adjusting the map

direction or scale, then each screen can be

adjusted independently.

Split: 2D Map

Split: BirdviewTM Map

Other settings

The map view can also be set by performing the

following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Map View] and push .

4. Highl ight [Change View] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(39,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

. To display the 2D map:

Plan View map (Alternate Command

Mode)

. To display the BirdviewTM map:

Birdview map (Alternate Command Mode)

MAP VIEW SETTINGS

Other settings are also available for the map

screen, such as changing the map direction,

map color, BirdviewTM angle, etc.

Basic operation

1. Push while the current location

map screen is displayed.

2. Highlight [Map View] and push .

3. Highlight [Map Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available setting items

. [Map Orientation]:

Sets the map direction to North Up or

Heading Up.

Setting map orientation (page 2-14)

Navigation 2-13

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(40,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-14 Navigation

. [Long Range]:

Sets the long range map view display on/off.

Settings long range map view

(page 2-15)

. [Map Color]:

Changes the map color.

Setting map color (page 2-15)

. [Birdview Angle]:

Changes the BirdviewTM angle.

Changing BirdviewTM angle

(page 2-16)

. [Left Split Map Settings]:

Sets the map settings for the left screen of

the split map.

Setting left screen display

(page 2-16)

. [Show all Freeway Exits on Route]/[Auto.

Show Turn List on Freeway]:

Sets the display of the freeway exit informa-

tion on/off.

Show exit information on freeways

(page 2-51)

Other settings:

The orientation of the map can also be set by

performing the following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Map View] and push .

Setting map orientation

The map direction (orientation) can also be

changed in the 2D map. These settings are

available only in the 2D map or 2D/2D split map.

1. Highlight [Map Orientation] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred map orientation and

push . The indicator of the

selected map orientation illuminates.

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Available map orientations

. [North Up]:

The top of the map remains oriented to the

north.

. [Heading Up]:

The top of the map follows the traveling

direction.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(41,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

If the map orientation is switched, the icon

displayed in the lower left corner is also

switched.

: North Up

: Heading Up

North Up

Heading Up

INFO:

The direction of the map can also be changed by

touching the icon on the map screen.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To charge the map direction:

North Up (Alternate Command Mode)

Heading Up (Alternate Command Mode)

Settings long range map view

The position of the vehicle icon can be changed

to view a wider area in the traveling direction. If

this function is activated, the vehicle icon is

located slightly lower than the center of the

screen.

1. Highl ight [Long Range] and push

. The indicator illuminates.

2. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Long Range Map View

INFO:

[Long Range] is displayed only when [Heading

Up] is selected.

Setting map color

The map color can be changed to a warm or

cool color, or a light color, to emphasize the

traffic information.

Navigation 2-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(42,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-16 Navigation

1. Highlight [Map Color] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred map color and push

. The indicator light of the se-

lected color illuminates.

Available map colors

The following map colors are available.

. [Warm]:

Sets warm colors for the map coloring.

. [Cool]:

Sets cool colors for the map coloring.

. [Traffic Emphasis]:

Sets light colors for the map coloring to

emphasize the traffic information.

INFO:

The effect of the setting changes can be

confirmed on the preview displayed on the right

side of the screen.

Changing BirdviewTM angle

The BirdviewTM angle can be changed.

This setting is available only in the BirdviewTM

map or 2D/BirdviewTM split map.

1. Highlight [Birdview Angle] and push

.

2. Adjust the BirdviewTM angle by rotating the

center dial.

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Setting left screen display

When the split screen is displayed, the map

settings of the left screen can be changed.

1. Highlight [Left Split Map Settings] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(43,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Highlight the preferred map setting and

push .

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Map Orientation]:

The map direction can be selected as

follows.

[North Up]:

The top of the map remains oriented to the north.

[Heading Up]:

The top of the map follows the traveling direction.

. [Long Range]:

Positions the vehicle icon slightly lower than

the center of the screen. This offers a wider

view in the traveling direction.

. [Map Scale]:

Displays a scale on the left side of the

screen. Use this to change the scale of a

map.

INFO:

. The settings of the right screen are the same

as the settings of the full screen map.

. The icon on the map can also be changed

by touching the direction and scale of the

map.

LOOKING AT INFORMATION ON MAP

Icons can be displayed on the map, and

information about destinations and landmarks

can be displayed.

Displaying map icons

The map icons can be displayed or hidden by

type.

1. Push while the current location

map screen is displayed.

2. Highlight [Map Icons] and push .

Navigation 2-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(44,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-18 Navigation

3. Highlight the preferred icon and push

. The icon display setting toggles

between on and off each time is

pushed. The indicator of the selected icon

illuminates.

4. Push to return to the current

location map screen. The activated icons

are displayed on the map.

INFO:

If they are registered in the map data, the brand

icons will be displayed on the map instead of the

general map icons listed below.

Map icons that can be displayed

The following map items can be displayed.

. Restaurant

. Gas Station

. Hotel

. ATM

. Rest Area

Other settings:

The map icons can also be set by performing the

following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Map Icons] and push .

INFO:

The map icons are not displayed on the map

screen when the map scale is set to 1/4 mile

(500 m) or higher in the 2D map, or to 1 mile (2

km) or higher in the BirdviewTM map.

Map scrolling information

Information about the location, on which the

center of the cross pointer is placed by scrolling

on the map, can be set to be displayed.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(45,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. Highlight [Others] and push .

4. Highlight [Map Scrolling Information] and

push .

5. Highlight the preferred information item and

push . The indicator of the

selected information item illuminates.

The following information items are available.

. [Address Book Icons]

. [Destination/Waypoint Icons]

. [Latitude/Longitude Info]

6. Push to return to the current

location map screen. Move the cross pointer

to the set location to display the information.

MAP MENU SCREEN

Push while the current location map

screen or a scrolled map screen is displayed to

display the menu corresponding to that screen.

This menu can be used to access helpful

functions quickly, such as setting a destination

and searching for points of interest nearby.

There are various methods used to select a

menu item. Use a method described earlier in

this manual.

Menu screens and their purposes

(page 1-10)

INFO:

With the touch panel operation, the same

screen can be displayed by touching [Map

Menu] located on the map screen.

Current location map screen

If is pushed while the current

Navigation 2-19

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(46,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-20 Navigation

location map screen is displayed, the following

options are available.

. [Store Location]:

Stores the current vehicle location in the

Address Book. The stored location can be

retrieved as necessary to set it as a

destination (waypoint).

Storing location (page 2-70)

. [Nearby Places]:

Searches for points of interest near the

current vehicle location, such as restaurants

and gas stations, etc.

Finding nearby place (page 2-27)

. [Map View]:

Performs map operations such as the

switching of map type and the setting of

map orientation and scale.

Map settings (page 2-5)

. [Map Icons]:

Displays map icons of certain points of

interest (such as restaurants and gas sta-

tions, etc.) on the map around the current

vehicle location.

Displaying map icons (page 2-17)

. [Store Tracking]:

Stores in the Address Book the route

travelled from the starting point to the

current location.

Storing tracked route (page 2-74)

Scrolled location map screen

If is pushed while a scrolled map

screen is displayed, the following options are

available.

. [New Dest.]:

Sets the destination to the map location

where was pushed. If a destina-

tion is already set, the location will be set as

the new destination.

Setting point on map (page 2-42)

. [Add to Route]:

Sets the map location where

was pushed as the destination or a way-

point. This is available only when a sug-

gested route is already set.

Setting destination or waypoint

(page 2-56)

. [Nearby Places]:

Searches for points of interest near the map

location where was pushed and

sets them as a destination or waypoint.

Use the same search method as the one for

[Places].

Finding nearby place (page 2-27)

. [Store Location]:

Store the map location where

was pushed in the Address Book. The

stored location can be retrieved to set it as

a destination or waypoint.

Storing location (page 2-70)

. [Delete]:

Deletes a stored location. To delete, place

the cross pointer over the corresponding

icon.

. [Incident Detail]:

This function can be selected only when the

traffic information icon is displayed. Displays

the details of the traffic information icon.

Place the cross pointer over the icon to be

checked.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(47,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

Incident details are a feature of Traffic Informa-

tion, and that a NavTraffic subscription is

required in order to receive Traffic Information.

Navigation 2-21

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(48,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-22 Navigation

MAP SYMBOLS

This navigation system uses symbols to display facilities.

2-dimensional icons (Plan View)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(49,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Road color

The road types are differentiated by colors.

Freeway:

(Red or light red (zoomed in))

Main road:

(Brown or dark yellow)

Narrow street:

(Gray)

Road with incomplete map data:

(Dark green)

Traffic information on map

With a subscription to the NavTraffic service,

traffic information is displayed.

Viewing available traffic information

(page 6-7)

Free Flow:

(Green)

Moderate traffic:

(Yellow)

Heavy traffic:

(Red)

Section affected by serious traffic event:

(Purple)

The following traffic information icons may be

displayed

Accident

Closed road

Information

Road work

Slippery road

Weather

Incident

DESTINATION SCREEN

There are several methods that can be used to

set a destination. Understand the advantages of

each method and select the best method for

finding and setting a preferred destination.

Basic operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight the preferred destination setting

method and push .

Available setting items

. Street Address:

Searches for a destination by address.

. Places:

Searches for a destination from various

categories of business, locations or

searches from the facilities in ZAGAT (if so

equipped).

Navigation 2-23

SETTING DESTINATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(50,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-24 Navigation

. Home:

Searches for a route from the current

location to the previously stored home

destination.

. Address Book:

Searches for a destination from the list of the

stored locations.

. Previous Destinations:

Searches for a destination from the previous

destinations.

. Delete Destination:

Deletes the currently set destination.

Available setting items (next page screen)

. Previous Start Point:

Sets the previous starting point as the

destination.

. Stored Routes:

Selects a stored route.

. Phone Number:

Searches for a point of interest by a

telephone number.

INFO:

The system cannot search for a location using

residential phone numbers.

. Freeway Entrance/Exit:

Searches for a destination from a freeway

entrance/exit.

. Intersection:

Searches for a destination from intersec-

tions.

. City Center:

Sets the center of a city as the destination.

Changing region

When setting a destination, the location can be

narrowed down by specifying the region or city.

Specifying region:

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Change Region] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred region and push

.

Available setting items

. US1: CA, NV

. US2: AZ, CO, ID, MT, NM, OR, UT, WA, WY

. US3: IA, KS, MN, MO, ND, NE, SD

. US4: AR, LA, MS, OK, TX

. US5: IL, IN, MI, WI

. US6: DC, DE, KY, MD, OH, PA, VA, WV

. US7: CT, MA, ME, NH, NJ, NY, RI, VT

. US8: AL, FL, GA, NC, SC, TN

. US9: AK

. US10: HI

. Canada

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(51,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. Puerto Rico

. Virgin Islands

INFO:

. It is also possible to select a region by

touching the map on the right side of the

screen.

. It is not possible to search for a route from

the continental United States to Hawaii,

Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands.

Specifying city:

When searching for a destination with Places,

Freeway Entrance/Exit, Intersection or City

Center, the search can be narrowed down by

specifying the city.

1. Highlight [Select a City] and push

.

2. Enter the name of the city, highlight [List]

and push .

A list screen is displayed.

INFO:

. The same screen will be displayed when

a location is searched from a street

address, and when [City] is highlighted

and is pushed on the screen.

Finding address (page 2-25)

. Highlight [Last 5 Cities] and push

to display the last 5 cities

recently set as destinations.

3. Highlight the city of the destination from the

list and push .

INFO:

In some cases, when a city name has been

entered, the number of matching destinations in

the Matches column may be different from the

number displayed on the list screen. If this

occurs, enter more characters to further reduce

the number of matches.

FINDING ADDRESS

When the address of the destination is known,

use the following method to enter the address

and then have the system calculate a route. A

location near the preferred destination can also

be searched by entering the house number if the

map data contains the relevant data.

Navigation 2-25

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(52,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-26 Navigation

1. Push , highlight [Street Address]

and push . A character input

screen is displayed.

2. Enter the house number, highlight [OK] and

push . If the house number is not

available, highlight [No House #] and push

. A street name input screen is

displayed.

3. Enter the name of the street. After finishing

the entry, highlight [List] and push

. A list of streets is displayed.

INFO:

When [City] is highlighted and is

pushed, a city can be specified by typing the

city name.

Specifying city (page 2-25)

4. Highlight the correct street of the destina-

tion from the list and push .

INFO:

In some cases, when a street name has

been entered, the number of matching

destinations in the Matches column may

be different from the number displayed on

the list screen. If this occurs, enter more

characters to further reduce the number of

matches.

5. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(53,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted, the route

can be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To set the destination from a street address:

Navigation Address (Standard Mode)

Address (Alternate Command Mode)

INFO:

When using a voice command to set a street

name, it is recommended that the complete

street name is stated.

Examples:

Correct input - North Elm Street

East Jefferson Boulevard

Incorrect input - Elm Street

East Jefferson

FINDING PLACE

There are several methods that can be used to

set the destination to places of interest: typing

the name, choosing a category or selecting a

location reviewed by ZAGAT (if so equipped).

To help improve searching, different start points

can be chosen to search from such as near

current location, near the destination or city

center.

Finding nearby place

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Places] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred nearby category from

the list and push .

A list screen is displayed.

INFO:

Highlight [Customize Nearby Places] to

customize the nearby places list to show

categories that are frequently used.

4. Highlight the preferred destination from the

list, and push . The position of

the selected location is displayed in the

Navigation 2-27

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(54,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-28 Navigation

preview on the right side of the screen.

INFO:

. A maximum of 100 facilities can be

displayed on the list screen.

. If the suggested route is already set, the

system displays the facilities located

along the route. To display all the icons,

deactivate [Show Along Route].

5. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

If there is a route already set, the newly selected

location can substitute a previously set destina-

tion or can be added to a route already set.

Other settings:

The destination can also be set by pushing

in the current or scrolled location

map screen and selecting [Nearby Places].

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the nearby category list and select the

destination from it:

Navigation Places (Standard Mode)

Places (Alternate Command Mode)

Searching by other methods

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Places] and push .

3. Highlight [All Categories or Name] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(55,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4. Set the narrowing down conditions for the

landmarks and push .

INFO:

Highlight [Change Region] and push

to change the region. A screen

for selecting a region is displayed.

Changing region (page 2-24)

INFO:

If [Select a City] is highlighted and

is pushed, a city name input

screen is displayed. Specify the city to be

searched before narrowing down the cate-

gories.

Specifying city (page 2-25)

5. Highlight the main category from the list and

push .

INFO:

To select a category by directly inputting the

category name, highlight [Category Search]

and push . The category name

input screen is displayed.

6. Highlight the subcategory and push

.

INFO:

Subcategories may not exist depending on

the category that is selected.

Navigation 2-29

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(56,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-30 Navigation

7. Enter the name of the destination facility and

highlight [List], and then push .

The facility list is displayed.

INFO:

. It is not necessary to enter the facility

name completely. It is also possible to

display the list screen only by highlighting

[List] without entering the facility name

and pushing .

. The number of narrowed down points are

displayed in the Matches column.

. Up to two keywords (part of the facility

name) can be entered by highlighting

[AND Search] and pushing

after entering the first facility name.

INFO:

The facility name can also be entered

directly by highlighting [Choose Name] on

the main category list screen and pushing

.

8. Highlight the preferred destination from the

list, and push .

INFO:

. By highlighting [Sort] and pushing

, options can be sorted from

[By Name] or [By Dist.]. When selecting

[By Dist.], the position of the selected

location is displayed in the preview on

the right side of the screen.

. In some cases, when a facility name has

been entered, the number of matching

destinations in the Matches column

may be different from the number dis-

played on the list screen. If this occurs,

enter more characters to further reduce

the number of matches.

. The search conditions can be changed

by highlighting [Refine].

9. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted, the route

can be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(57,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Searching for restaurant using ZA- GAT (if so equipped)

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Places] and push .

3. Highlight [ZAGAT] and push .

4. Highlight the preferred state and push

. A list screen is displayed.

5. Highlight the preferred city and push

. A list screen is displayed.

6. Highlight [RESTAURANT] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

7. Highlight the preferred category and push

. A list screen is displayed.

Navigation 2-31

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(58,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-32 Navigation

8. Highlight the preferred sorting order and

push . A list screen is displayed.

9. Highlight the preferred destination facility

from the list, and then push .

INFO:

. By highlighting [Sort] and pushing

, sorting options can be se-

lected to re-sort the list.

. The search conditions can be changed

by highlighting [Refine].

. By highlighting [Ratings] and pushing

, an explanation of the ZAGAT

ratings can be displayed.

10. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination and pushing

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted, the route

can be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

*C 2009 Zagat Survey, LLC. Zagat Survey is a

registered trademark of Zagat Survey, LLC.

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION

The home location can be set as the destination

to which the system calculates a route. This

function is especially useful when searching for

a route to return to the home location.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Home] and push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(59,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. The home location is displayed, and the

system sets the home location as the

destination.

INFO:

If the home location is not stored yet, the

system will automatically display a screen for

storing it.

Storing location (page 2-70)

4. The entire route to the home location is

shown on the map. Highlight [Start] after

confirming the location of the displayed

destination, and push . The

system sets the destination to the selected

location and starts calculating a route.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To set the home location as the destination:

Navigation Home (Standard Mode)

Home (Alternate Command Mode)

SEARCHING FROM ADDRESS BOOK

Storing frequently used destinations in the

Address Book makes it easy for the system to

set and calculate a route. To utilize this function

more effectively, destinations that are often

traveled to should be stored in advance.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Address Book] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

3. Highlight the preferred location from the list

and push .

Navigation 2-33

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(60,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-34 Navigation

INFO:

Selecting [Sort] displays a list of various sort

functions. To use the sort functions, stored

locations must be set in advance.

Storing location (page 2-70)

INFO:

. Sorted By Number:

The Address Book entries are displayed in ascending numerical order.

. Sorted By Name:

The Address Book entries are displayed in alphabetic order.

. Sorted By Icon:

By selecting a particular icon, a list that contains only the Address Book entries associated with that icon is displayed.

. Sorted By Group:

By selecting a particular group (family, friends, leisure, etc.), the selected group is displayed at the top of the list.

4. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location of

the destination can be adjusted, the route can

be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To set the destination from the Address Book:

Navigation Address Book (Standard Mode)

Address book (Alternate Command Mode)

SETTING PREVIOUS DESTINATION

It is possible to set the destination to a location

that has been previously set as a destination and

have the system calculate a route. Up to 300

previous destinations will be automatically

stored.

If the number of previous destinations exceeds

300, the oldest one will be replaced by the

newest one.

1. Push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(61,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Highlight [Previous Destinations] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

3. Highlight the preferred destination from the

list and push .

INFO:

The list can be sorted by selecting [By Date]

or [By Name]. Highlight [By Date] to sort the

list in chronological order. Highlight [By

Name] to sort the list in alphabetical order.

4. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location of

the destination can be adjusted, the route can

be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the previous destinations list:

Navigation Previous Destinations (Standard

Mode)

Previous Destinations (Alternate Command

Mode)

SETTING PREVIOUS START POINT

It is possible to set the destination to the start

point of a previous route guidance and have the

system calculate a route.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Next Page] and push .

3. Highlight [Previous Start Point] and push

.

Navigation 2-35

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(62,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-36 Navigation

4. The previous start point is set as a destina-

tion, and the entire route is shown on the

map. Highlight [Start] after confirming the

location of the displayed destination, and

push . The system sets the

destination to the selected location and

starts calculating a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location of

the destination can be adjusted, the route can

be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To set a previous start point as the destination:

Previous Start Point (Alternate Command

Mode)

SETTING FROM STORED ROUTES

It is possible to select a preferred route from the

stored routes.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Next Page] and push .

3. Highlight [Stored Routes] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

4. Highlight the preferred route from the list

and push . The route to the

destination is set.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(63,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

. Even after setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted, the

location can be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

. The stored route includes only locations

(destination and waypoints) and route cal-

culation conditions, not the route itself.

Therefore, when the destination is set using

a stored route, a different route may be

suggested if the current vehicle location is

different from the one when the route was

stored.

SETTING BY PHONE NUMBER

If the phone number of a facility is known, it is

possible to search for a facility by entering the

phone number, and have the system calculate a

route.

INFO:

. Telephone numbers that were stored for

stored destinations can also be used.

. If the area code of the specified telephone

number does not exist in the map data, the

system cannot search for the location.

. Only the locations included in the database

in the map data can be searched by the

phone number. Residential phone numbers

cannot be used to search for a location.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Next Page] and push .

3. Highlight [Phone Number] and push

. The telephone number input

screen is displayed.

4. Enter the telephone number including the

area code.

5. After finishing the entry, highlight [List] and

push .

Number input screen (page 1-15)

Navigation 2-37

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(64,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-38 Navigation

6. A list screen is displayed if there are two or

more search results. Highlight the preferred

destination from the list and push

.

A confirmation screen for the place name

and the location is displayed, and the system

starts calculating.

7. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location of

the destination can be adjusted, the route can

be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

SETTING FREEWAY ENTRANCE/ EXIT

It is possible to set the destination to an

entrance or exit of a freeway and have the

system calculate a route.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Next Page] and push .

3. Highlight [Freeway Entrance/Exit] and push

. A character input screen is

displayed.

4. Enter the name of the freeway.

5. After finishing the entry, highlight [List] and

push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(65,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6. Highlight the freeway of the destination from

the list, and push .

7. Highlight [Entrance] or [Exit] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

8. Select the preferred destination from the list.

The position of the selected location is

displayed in the preview on the right side

of the screen. Then, push .

INFO:

Select [By Distance] to sort the list by the

nearest distance.

9. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location of

the destination can be adjusted, the route can

be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

SETTING INTERSECTION

It is possible to set an intersection of any two

streets as the destination and have the system

calculate a route.

Navigation 2-39

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(66,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-40 Navigation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Next Page] and push .

3. H igh l igh t [ In te rsect ion ] and push

. A character input screen is

displayed.

4. Enter the name of the 1st street.

After finishing the entry, highlight [List] and

push . A list screen is displayed.

5. Highlight a street as the 1st street from the

list and push . A character input

screen is displayed.

6. Enter the name of the 2nd street.

After finishing the entry, highlight [List] and

push . A list screen is displayed.

7. Highlight a street as the 2nd street from the

list and push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(67,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8. The entire route is shown on the map.

Highlight [Start] after confirming the location

of the displayed destination, and push

. The system sets the destination

to the selected location and starts calculat-

ing a route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location of

the destination can be adjusted, the route can

be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

SETTING CITY CENTER

It is possible to set the center of a city as a

destination and have the system calculate a

route.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Next Page] and push .

3. H igh l ight [Ci ty Center ] and push

. A character input screen is

displayed.

4. Enter the name of the city, highlight [List]

and push . A list screen is

displayed.

INFO:

Highlight [Last 5 Cities] and push

to display the last 5 cities

recently set as destinations.

5. Highlight the preferred destination from the

list and push . The position of the

selected location is displayed in the preview

Navigation 2-41

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(68,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-42 Navigation

on the right side of the screen.

INFO:

Select [By Distance] to sort the list by the

nearest distance.

6. The selected destination is displayed at the

center of the map. Highlight [Start] after

confirming the location of the displayed

destination, and push .

The system sets the destination to the

selected location and starts calculating a

route.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted, the route

can be stored, etc.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

SETTING POINT ON MAP

It is possible to set a location scrolled to on the

map as the destination and have the system

calculate a route.

1. Scroll the map, place the cross pointer over

the preferred location, and push .

INFO:

. The map scale should be adjusted to

search for a location more effectively.

. The point on the blinking road where the

center of the cross pointer is located can

be set as a destination.

2. Highlight [New Dest.] and push .

INFO:

For the items other than [New Dest.], refer to

Map menu screen.

Scrolled location map screen

(page 2-20)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(69,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. The system sets the destination to the

selected location and starts calculating a

route.

INFO:

If a point on a freeway is set as the destination, a

confirmation message is displayed.

DELETE DESTINATION

It is possible to delete a destination and all

waypoints that have already been set.

1. Press .

2. Select [Delete Destination] and press

.

3. A confirmation message is displayed. Select

[Yes] and press .

The destination and the waypoints are

deleted.

INFO:

The deleted destination and waypoints are not

able to be reactivated.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To delete a destination and all waypoints:

Delete Destination (Alternate Command

Mode)

Navigation 2-43

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(70,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-44 Navigation

PROCEDURES AFTER SETTING DESTINATION

After performing a route search, the route

guidance can be immediately started. Also, it is

possible to confirm or change a route.

Available items after setting destination

. [Start]:

Starts route guidance to the selected

destination.

Starting route guidance (page 2-44)

. [More Routes]:

Displays 3 alternative routes.

Selecting route (page 2-44)

. [Add/Route Info]:

Displays the route information. A destination

or a waypoint can also be added.

Confirming route (page 2-45)

. [Move Location]:

Displays a map screen. The location of the

destination can be adjusted.

Moving location of destination

(page 2-46)

. [Store Location]:

Stores the location in the Address Book.

Storing location (page 2-47)

. [Place Info]:

Displays information about the facility that

has been set as the destination, if it is

included in the map data.

Viewing information about searched

location (page 2-47)

INFO:

. If no operations have been performed on the

system for several seconds, [Start] is auto-

matically selected, and the system starts

route guidance.

. When using waypoints, [More Routes] is

disabled. After the route is started, push

VOICE> then select [Edit/Add to

Route] to change the route between each

waypoint.

Editing route (page 2-55)

. Even if the map screen is touched, the same

map screen as when [Move Location] is

selected is displayed.

Starting route guidance

1. Highlight [Start] and push .

Route guidance starts.

Selecting route

1. Highl ight [More Routes] and push

.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(71,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Highlight the preferred route condition and

push .

3. The display automatically returns to the map

screen.

Available route conditions

. [Short. Time] (purple):

Prioritizes by the shortest time.

. [Min. Freeway] (orange):

Minimizes the use of freeways.

. [Short. Dist.] (green):

Prioritizes by the shortest distance.

INFO:

. When the route is selected, a preview is

displayed on the right side of the screen.

. The 3 routes may not always be different.

Confirming route

1. Highlight [Add/Route Info] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred information item and

push .

3. Push to return to the previous

screen.

Available information

. [Turn List]:

Displays the details of the suggested route.

Using turn list (page 2-60)

. [Preview]:

The system will trace the planned route

going forward or in reverse.

Using route preview (page 2-60)

. [Add Way Pt.]:

Edits the route by adding a waypoint or a

destination.

Adding destination or waypoint

(page 2-46)

. [Store Route]:

Stores a calculated route. A maximum of 5

routes can be stored. Stored routes can be

easily retrieved and set as the suggested

route.

Storing route (page 2-73)

. [Map Scroll]:

Displays a map screen where the location of

the destination can be confirmed. Even if the

map screen is touched, the same map

screen as when [Map Scroll] is selected is

displayed.

Navigation 2-45

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(72,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-46 Navigation

Adding destination or waypoint:

Before starting route guidance, destinations

and/or waypoints can be added. A total of 6

destinations or waypoints can be set.

1. Highlight [Add Way Pt.] and push

.

2. Set additional destinations or waypoints and

push .

The method of searching for a location is the

same as the one for a destination.

Setting destination (page 2-23)

3. Highlight [Add Destination] or [Add Way-

point] and push .

4. The system starts calculating a route that

includes the added destination or waypoint.

When the calculation is finished, the route is

displayed.

INFO:

. If a waypoint was added, [More Routes]

cannot be selected.

. If a destination was added, the prior

destination becomes a waypoint.

Moving location of destination

The location of the destination can be adjusted

by moving the cross pointer across the map.

1. Highlight [Move Location] and push

.

INFO:

The screen for adjusting the location also

changes by touching the map screen dis-

played on the right side of the screen.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(73,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Adjust the location by moving the cross

pointer across the map and push

. The location of the destination

is modified.

INFO:

Even if the map screen is touched, the same

map screen as when [Move Location] is

selected is displayed.

Storing location

A searched location can be stored in the

Address Book. Then it can be easily retrieved

and set as a destination (or waypoint).

1. Highlight [Store Location] and push

.

2. The location is stored in the Address Book.

The corresponding icon is displayed at the

set location on the map.

Viewing information about searched location

Information (street address and phone number)

about places stored in the map data can be

displayed.

1. Select [Place Info] and push .

2. Information about the location is displayed.

3. Push to return to the previous

screen.

Navigation 2-47

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(74,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-48 Navigation

INFO:

. If [Call] is displayed on the right side of the

screen, it is possible to call the location

indicated.

. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone system

is required to be active and the cellular

phone connected to call the location in-

dicated.

. Information about locations is not displayed

while driving.

ABOUT ROUTE GUIDANCE

After setting the route, select [Start] to begin

route guidance.

Throughout route guidance, the system navi-

gates you through the guide points using visual

and voice guidance.

CAUTION

. The navigation systems visual and

voice guidance is for reference pur-

poses only. The contents of the

guidance may be inappropriate de-

pending on the situation.

. Follow all traffic regulations when

driving along the suggested route

(e.g., one-way traffic).

Route guidance (page 11-8)

Voice guidance during route gui- dance

When approaching a guide point (intersection or

corner), destination, etc. during route guidance,

voice guidance announces the remaining dis-

tance and/or turning direction. Push

VOICE> to repeat voice guidance.

Example of voice guidance:

*1 In about one quarter mile (400 meters), right

(left) turn.

Right (left) turn ahead.

*2 In about one quarter mile (400 meters) freeway

entrance on your right onto (road number and

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(75,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

direction).

Freeway entrance on your right onto (road

number and direction).

*3 In about one mile (1.6 kilometers), exit on your

right.

Exit on your right.

*4 You have arrived at your destination. Ending

route guidance.

Guidance screens and preview mode

Route guidance displays map screens and

various information according to the situation.

When route guidance starts, the Small Turn

Arrow on Map is displayed in the upper left

corner of the map screen. This arrow indicates

the turning direction at the next guide point

(corner or intersection). The distance is also

displayed. At the top of the screen, the distance

to the next guide point and the name of the next

street to turn on to are displayed. Also, there

may be cases that next street names are

announced. The Small Turn Arrow on Map can

be enabled or disabled by the user.

Displaying small turn arrow on map

(page 2-68)

Enlarged intersection view:

When approaching a guide point, the system

automatically changes to the split screen and

shows an enlarged view of the intersection on

the left screen. After passing through the

intersection, the system automatically returns

to the full screen mode. To switch to the full

screen mode while the enlarged intersection

view is displayed, push . Pushing

again displays the enlarged intersec-

tion view.

Junction guidance:

While driving on a freeway, when the vehicle is

approximately 1 mile (approximately 2 km) from a

junction, the system automatically switches to

the split screen and displays an enlarged view of

the junction (3D) on the left screen. After

passing the junction, the system automatically

returns to the full screen mode. To switch to the

full screen mode while the enlarged junction

view is displayed, push .

Navigation 2-49

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(76,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-50 Navigation

Turn list:

Depending on the setting, the system can

constantly display the split screen and show

the turn list on the left screen. When approach-

ing a guide point, the left screen automatically

switches to an enlarged view of the intersection.

To switch to the full screen mode, push

. Pushing again displays the

turn list.

Guidance screen settings

The guidance screen can be displayed at all

times even when the vehicle is located away

from the guide point. Various types of screens

can be set.

Split screen settings:

The display setting on the left-hand side screen

shown during route guidance can be changed.

1. Push while the current location

map screen is displayed.

2. Highlight [Map View] and push .

3. Highlight [View Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred screen and push

. The indicator of the selected

screen illuminates.

. Intersection

The map screen and the enlarged intersection

view can be displayed at the same time.

Push to switch to the full map screen.

. Turn list

The list screen for showing the guide points to

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(77,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

the destination and the map screen can be

displayed at the same time. An enlarged

intersection view is automatically displayed

when the vehicle approaches the guide point.

The turn list can be scrolled using the center dial

or by touching the up/down buttons on the

screen.

Push to switch to the full map screen.

Push again to display the turn list.

. Fuel Economy

The current fuel consumption rate, average fuel

consumption rate, instantaneous consumption

rate and distance to empty can be displayed on

the map screen. An enlarged intersection view is

automatically displayed when the vehicle ap-

proaches the guide point.

Push to switch to the full map screen.

Push again to display the fuel economy

screen. When approaching a guide point, the

enlarged view of the intersection is automatically

displayed. To display the fuel economy informa-

tion, push .

To display the map screen, push again.

NOTICE

Use the values displayed on the fuel

economy screen as a guide. When the

fuel gauge indicates empty or the low

fuel warning light illuminates even if

the distance to empty reading indicates

a sufficient amount of fuel remains,

refuel the vehicle as soon as possible.

. Full map

The current location map is displayed. An

enlarged intersection view is automatically dis-

played when the vehicle approaches the guide

point.

When an enlarged intersection view is dis-

played, pushing returns to the map

screen.

Show exit information on freeways:

When the vehicle travels on a highway or a toll

road, the display automatically provides exit

information in the turn list.

1. Push while the current location

map screen is displayed.

2. Highlight [Map View] and push .

Navigation 2-51

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(78,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-52 Navigation

3. Highlight [Map Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight [Show all Freeway Exits on Route]

or [Auto. Show Turn List on Freeway] and

push . The indicator illuminates

when the item is set.

5. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

. Showing freeway exit information

When [Show all Freeway Exits on Route] is set

to ON and the route includes the freeway or toll

road, all exits along the route which have exit

information will be shown in the turn list. The exit

information is shown as icons.

. Displaying turn list automatically on

freeway

When [Auto. Show Turn List on Freeway] is set

to ON, the turn list will be automatically

displayed while the vehicle travels on a freeway

or toll road.

. Selecting a waypoint from the exit

information list

When exit information is displayed on the turn

list, a waypoint to a facility located near the

freeway exit can be set as a waypoint.

1. Highlight the exit where the exit information

icon is displayed, and push . The

category list screen is displayed.

2. Highlight the landmark category and push

. The list screen for showing

facilities located near the freeway exit is

displayed.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(79,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. Highlight the preferred facility for the way-

point and push .

4. The waypoint is set, and the route search is

performed.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

ROUTE SCREEN

WARNING

Always stop the vehicle in a safe

location before modifying the route

conditions.

Modifying the route conditions while

driving may cause an accident.

During route guidance, the route conditions can

be modified and the route information can be

confirmed. Set route conditions according to

personal preference.

Basic operation

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push .

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Cancel Route/Resume Route]:

Cancels the current route guidance. A

canceled route can also be reactivated. If

the suggested route is canceled, [Cancel

Route] changes to [Resume Route].

Canceling/reactivating route

(page 2-54)

. [Edit/Add to Route]:

Edit or add a destination or waypoints to the

route that is already set.

Editing route (page 2-55)

. [Route Info]:

Confirm the route by the route information or

simulation. The confirmed route can also be

stored.

Confirming route (page 2-60)

. [Guidance Settings]:

Activates or deactivates route, voice gui-

dance and/or traffic announcement and

adjust the volume level of voice guidance.

Guidance settings (page 2-61)

. [Recalculate]:

Manually search for the route again after

changing the search condition and have the

system calculate a route.

Navigation 2-53

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(80,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-54 Navigation

Recalculate route (page 2-62)

. [Detour]:

A detour of a specified distance can be

calculated.

Setting detour route (page 2-63)

. [Traffic Detour]:

Manually search for an alternative detour

route taking the traffic information into

consideration.

Searching for detour route taking

traffic information into consideration

(page 2-63)

. [Route Settings]:

Changes the route calculation conditions

anywhere along the route.

Setting conditions for route calcula-

tion (page 2-65)

Canceling/reactivating route

A route that is already set can be canceled at

any time. If a route is deleted, the destination

and waypoints are also canceled.

It is also possible to reactivate a canceled route.

INFO:

Canceling a route does not delete the destina-

tion and waypoint information completely. To

delete the destination and waypoints completely.

Delete destination (page 2-43)

Canceling route:

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Cancel Route] and push

.

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

Highlight [Yes] and push .

The route is canceled along with the

destination and waypoints.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To cancel a route:

Cancel Route (Alternate Command Mode)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(81,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Reactivating route:

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Resume Route] and push

.

3. A confirmation message is displayed. High-

light [Yes] and push . The can-

celed route is reactivated.

INFO:

If a new route is set, the canceled route cannot

be reactivated.

Editing route

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Edit/Add to Route] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred condition and push

.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

*1 Adds a destination.

Setting destination or waypoint

(page 2-56)

*2 Current destination:

Changes or deletes the destination.

Editing/deleting destination or waypoint

(page 2-57)

*3 Condition for calculating a route to the destina-

tion:

Changes the conditions for calculating a route to

the destination.

Changing route calculation conditions

(page 2-59)

*4 Adds a waypoint.

Setting destination or waypoint

(page 2-56)

*5 Current waypoint:

Changes or deletes the waypoint.

Editing/deleting destination or waypoint

(page 2-57)

Navigation 2-55

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(82,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-56 Navigation

*6 Condition for calculating a route to a waypoint:

Changes the conditions for calculating a route to

a waypoint.

Changing route calculation conditions

(page 2-59)

*7 [Calculate]:

Manually search for the route again after chan-

ging the search conditions and have the system

calculate a route.

Changing route calculation conditions

(page 2-59)

Setting destination or waypoint:

A destination or waypoint can be added to the

route that has already been set. A total of 6

destinations or waypoints can be set.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Edit/Add to Route] and push

.

3. Highlight [Add Destination] or [Add Way-

point] and push .

If [Add Destination] is selected, the current

destination changes to a waypoint.

4. Set a destination or waypoint. The method of

searching for a destination or waypoint is the

same as the one for a destination.

Setting destination (page 2-23)

5. The selected location is displayed at the

center of the map. Highlight [Add to Route]

after confirming the location and push

.

INFO:

Even after setting a destination/waypoint,

the destination/waypoint location can be

adjusted, the route can be stored, etc.

Editing/deleting destination or way-

point (page 2-57)

6. Return to the [Edit Route] screen. Set the

route conditions as necessary.

7. Highlight [Calculate] and push .

The system will recalculate the routes. After

the route search is completed, the display

will automatically return to the current

location map screen.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(83,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

. The prior route is automatically deleted.

. Added waypoints and search conditions will

not be taken into consideration for the route

calculation until [Calculate] is highlighted

and is pushed.

Editing/deleting destination or waypoint:

The destination or waypoint that has already

been set can be modified or deleted.

If a location is modified or deleted when a

suggested route is already set, the prior

suggested route will be recalculated accord-

ingly.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Edit/Add to Route] and push

.

3. Highlight a destination or waypoint that is

already set and push .

4. Highlight [Move Dest.] to modify the location

and push .

Moving location of destination

(page 2-46)

5. Highlight [Delete] and push to

delete the location.

6. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push . The destination

or waypoint is deleted from the route. Return

to the [Edit Route] screen.

7. By highlighting [Calculate] and pushing

, the system will recalculate the

routes. After the route search is completed,

the display will automatically return to the

current location map screen.

Navigation 2-57

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(84,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-58 Navigation

INFO:

. If the destination is deleted, the final

waypoint of the route becomes the destina-

tion.

. Even if the map screen is touched, the same

map screen as when [Move Dest.] is

selected is displayed.

Changing order of destination and way-

points:

The order of a destination and waypoints that

have already been set can be changed.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Edit/Add to Route] and push

.

3. Highlight a destination or waypoint that is

already set and push .

4. Highlight [Change Order] and push

. A list of the destination and

waypoints is displayed.

5. Highlight a preferred destination or waypoint

to replace the previously selected destina-

tion or waypoint and push .

6. A message is displayed and the order of the

destination or waypoint is changed.

7. By highlighting [Calculate] and pushing

, the system will recalculate the

routes. After the route search is complete,

the display will automatically return to the

current location map screen.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(85,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Changing route calculation conditions:

Each section of the route between waypoints

can have different route calculation conditions.

After setting these conditions, the entire route

can be recalculated.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Edit/Add to Route] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred section of the route

to the destination or waypoint and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred condition and push

.

Available conditions

: [Fastest Route]

: [Minimize Freeway]

: [Shortest Route]

5. The conditions have been changed and the

display returns to the [Edit Route] screen.

6. By highlighting [Calculate] and pushing

, the system will recalculate the

routes. After the route search is completed,

the display will automatically return to the

current location map screen.

INFO:

. The recalculated route may not be the

shortest route because the system priori-

tizes roads that are easy to drive for safety

reasons.

. If the route conditions are set from [Route

Settings], all sections in the route are

subject to the same route conditions. This

applies even if different route conditions

have been set for different sections in [Edit

Route].

Navigation 2-59

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(86,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-60 Navigation

Confirming route

When the suggested route is displayed after

calculation, the route information can be con-

firmed or the suggested route can be simulated.

Basic operation:

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Route Info] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available setting items

. [Turn List]:

Displays the details of the suggested route.

Using turn list (page 2-60)

. [Preview]:

The system will trace the planned route

going forward or in reverse.

Using route preview (page 2-60)

. [Simulation]:

Displays a simulation of the suggested

route. This function provides a detailed

image of the route with voice guidance.

Confirming route by simulation

(page 2-61)

. [Store Route]:

Stores a calculated route. A maximum of 5

routes can be stored. Stored routes can be

easily retrieved and set as the suggested

route.

Storing route (page 2-73)

. [Map Scroll]:

Displays a map screen where the location of

the destination can be confirmed.

Even if the map screen is touched, the same

map screen as when [Map Scroll] is

selected is displayed.

Using turn list:

1. Highlight [Turn List] and push .

2. The information (e.g., intersections) can be

confirmed on the route to the destination by

scrolling the screen using the center dial.

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Using route preview:

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(87,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1. Highlight [Preview] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred key and push

.

: Moves forward in the direction of the destination.

: Moves backward in the direction of the starting point.

/ : Pauses the route preview.

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Confirming route by simulation:

1. Highlight [Simulation] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred key and push

.

: Pauses the simulation.

: Resumes the simulation.

: Ends the simulation.

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Guidance settings

Various guidance settings can be set.

Basic operation:

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Guidance Settings] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Guidance Voice]:

Activates or deactivates voice guidance. The

indicator illuminates if voice guidance is

activated.

. [Guidance Volume]:

Adjusts the volume level of voice guidance.

. [Traffic Announcement]:

Provides the announcement of a traffic

information event on the route.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

Navigation 2-61

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(88,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-62 Navigation

To turn the Voice Guidance ON or OFF:

Voice Guidance On/Off (Alternate Com-

mand Mode)

Recalculate route

A route can be manually searched again after

changing the search condition. When the

vehicle deviates from the suggested route, the

route from the current location to the destination

is automatically searched again.

Manually re-searching route:

1. Push VOICE>.

2. H igh l igh t [Reca lcu la te ] and push

.

3. A message is displayed, and the route is

recalculated.

4. Set the route conditions. After finishing the

sett ing, highl ight [Start] and push

.

Procedures after setting destination

(page 2-44)

INFO:

When a waypoint has been set on the route, the

system will search for only one route even if

route recalculation is performed.

Setting Auto Reroute:

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Route Settings] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(89,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. Highlight [Other Routing Choices] and push

.

4. Highlight [Auto Reroute] and push

. The indicator illuminates. When

the current location map screen or route

setting screen is displayed, the system

recalculates a route with the set conditions.

Detailed route settings (page 2-65)

Setting detour route

To detour from the suggested route, a route

detouring for a specified distance can be

calculated.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Detour] and push .

3. Highlight a detour distance and push

.

After calculating the detour, the system displays

the detour route on the map.

INFO:

. When the vehicle has deviated from the

suggested route, [Detour] cannot be se-

lected.

. If the system cannot calculate a detour with

the specified conditions, it displays the

previous suggested route.

. If the vehicle is traveling very fast, the detour

route may start from a location that the

vehicle has already passed.

Searching for detour route taking traffic information into considera- tion

When a serious traffic event occurs on the route,

or if the system finds a faster route, a detour alert

will pop up automatically. If the automatic alert is

not noticed, a detour can also be manually

searched.

Navigation 2-63

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(90,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-64 Navigation

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Traffic Detour] and push

.

3. When the detour search is successful,

detailed information about the detour route

(left screen) and the comparison screen of

the two routes (right screen) are displayed.

*1 Original route (yellow)

*2 Detour route (pink)

*3 The change of distance and estimated travel

time to destination when the detour route is

taken.

4. To accept the suggested detour route,

highlight [Yes], and then push .

INFO:

. If no route is set, or [Use Real Time Traffic

Information] is turned off, this function

cannot be operated.

. If a detour route is not selected and no

further action is performed, the detour route

will be automatically canceled.

. The detour suggestion can be retrieved even

after the message disappears by manually

selecting [Traffic Detour]. The system will

then search for the detour again and

suggests a detour if one is available at that

time.

. Without a subscription to an NavTraffic

broadcast, it will not be possible to get a

traffic detour or apply settings for functions

related to traffic information. A message

appears when a related menu item is

selected.

. See NOTES ON NavTraffic INFORMA-

TION for further information.

Notes on NavTraffic information

(page 11-11)

Automatic detour guidance:

When [Auto Reroute] and [Use Real Time Traffic

Information] are turned on in the detailed route

settings, a message will automatically pop up

when the system finds a detour.

Detailed route settings (page 2-65)

1. If a traffic jam or a serious traffic problem

occurs on the route while driving along the

suggested route, the automatic detour route

search starts and a message pops up if a

detour is found.

2. To accept the suggested detour route,

highlight [Yes] and push .

INFO:

. If no operation is performed for one minute

after the message is displayed, the message

disappears. The detour will not be accepted,

and the current suggested route will remain

unchanged.

. When [Traffic Announcement] is turned on in

the guidance settings, the system will

announce voice guidance at the same time

that the message appears on the screen.

Guidance settings (page 2-61)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(91,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Setting conditions for route calcu- lation

Search condition settings:

The route can be recalculated after changing the

route calculation conditions anywhere along the

route.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Route Settings] and push

.

3. Highlight [Basic Route Type] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred condition and push

. The indicator for the selected

condition illuminates.

5. When the conditions are set, the system

starts calculating the route with the new

conditions, and the current location map

screen is displayed.

Available conditions

. [Fastest Route]:

Prioritizes by the fastest time.

. [Minimize Freeway]:

Minimizes the use of motorways.

. [Shortest Route]:

Prioritizes by the shortest route.

INFO:

Only one of these conditions can be utilized at a

time.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To set conditions for the route calculation

(Alternate Command Mode):

Fastest Route

Minimize Freeway Route

Shortest Route

Detailed route settings:

Detailed conditions can be set for the route

calculation.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Route Settings] and push

.

3. Highlight [Other Routing Choices] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred condition and push

. The indicator for the selected

condition illuminates.

5. If [Route Settings] is exited after changing

the settings, the system starts calculating

the route with the new conditions.

Available setting items

. [Minimize Toll Roads]:

Minimizes the use of toll roads.

. [Use Time Restricted Roads]:

Uses any roads subject to time restrictions.

Navigation 2-65

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(92,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-66 Navigation

. [Use Statistical Traffic Information]:

Uses statistical traffic information that is

stored in the map data.

. [Use Real Time Traffic Information]:

Uses the latest traffic information received

via the SiriusXM broadcast.

. [Use Avoid Area Settings]:

Enables the avoid area setting.

. [Use Ferries]:

Includes the use of ferries.

. [Use Learned Routes]:

Uses the roads that are most frequently

traveled with the help of self-learning

technology.

. [Auto Reroute]:

If the vehicle deviates from the suggested

route, the system automatically recalculates

a route that leads the vehicle to the

suggested route.

INFO:

. The recalculated route may not be the

shortest route because the system priori-

tizes roads that are easy to drive for safety

reasons.

. If route conditions are set from [Route

Settings], all sections in the route are

subject to the same route conditions even

though different route conditions have been

set for different sections in [Edit/Add to

Route].

. If [Use Time Restricted Roads] is deacti-

vated, the system calculates a route without

any consideration of the regulations con-

cerning the time or day of the week. There-

fore, the suggested route may include a road

subject to traffic regulations concerning the

time or day of the week. When driving along

the route, always follow all traffic regulations

regardless of whether [Use Time Restricted

Roads] is set to on or off.

. If the system cannot calculate any alternative

routes, it displays the previous route.

. If the vehicle greatly deviates from the

suggested route, the system calculates a

new route.

. Statistical traffic information is based on

previous traffic data. When the traffic situa-

tion rapidly changes due to unexpected

accidents, construction work, traffic restric-

tions, emergencies, etc., the prediction

accuracy of the system may be reduced.

. Traffic jam information displayed on the map

screen is not statistical traffic information.

. When [Use Statistical Traffic Information] is

turned on, the system may lead to a road

where a traffic jam occurs or to a detour

even though the shortest route does not

have a traffic jam.

. Even when [Use Real Time Traffic Informa-

tion] is turned on, if traffic information has

not been provided for the area, sometimes it

is possible that a detour will not be indicated

in a location where a traffic jam occurs.

. The system may not lead to a detour if traffic

closure or a traffic jam occurs far from the

present location.

. The system calculates to reduce the time

required for the entire route from the start to

the destination. If there are no appropriate

routes, the system may lead to a route where

a traffic jam occurs instead of leading to a

detour.

. This system can learn and memorize the

route that is most frequently used. However,

despite driving on the same route several

times so that the system can learn the route,

the system may have difficulty learning the

route under the following conditions.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(93,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

[Use Time Restricted Roads] is set to on.

[Use Real Time Traffic Information] is set

to on.

ROUTE GUIDANCE SETTINGS

Various guidance information can be set to be

played during route guidance and the route and/

or voice guidance can be activated or deacti-

vated.

Basic operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Guidance Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

5. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Guidance Volume]:

Adjusts the volume level of voice guidance.

Guidance settings (page 2-61)

. [Guidance Voice]:

Activates or deactivates voice guidance.

The indicator illuminates if voice guidance is

activated.

Guidance settings (page 2-61)

. [Traffic Announcement]:

Provides an announcement of a traffic

information event on the route.

Guidance settings (page 2-61)

. [Voice Guidance Settings]:

Sets advanced settings for the voice gui-

dance announced at guide points.

Route guidance settings

(page 2-67)

. [Guidance Display Settings]:

Activates or deactivates small turn arrow

display on the map.

Displaying small turn arrow on map

(page 2-68)

. [Estimated Time]:

Switches the display of the estimated travel

time to the destination or waypoint that is

displayed on the map screen.

Switching estimated arrival time dis-

play (page 2-69)

. [Others]:

[Set Average Speeds]:

Sets an average vehicle speed for each type of road, which is reflected in the calculation of the required time to the destination.

Set average speeds (page 2-69)

[Auto Reroute]:

If the vehicle deviates from the sug- gested route, the system automatically recalculates a route that leads the vehicle to the suggested route.

Setting Auto Reroute (page 2-62)

Navigation 2-67

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(94,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-68 Navigation

Setting voice guidance at intersec- tions

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Guidance Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight [Voice Guidance Settings] and

push .

5. Highlight [Intersection Guidance Settings]

and push .

6. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available setting items

. [Voice Announcements]:

Sets how many times the voice guidance is

announced before the vehicle reaches an

intersection.

1. Highlight [Voice Announcements] and

push .

2. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

[Full]:

The system announces three kinds of voice guidance: Turning Point, 1 Guide and 2 Guide.

[Concise]:

The system announces two kinds of voice guidance: Turning Point and 1 Guide.

. [Turning Point]:

Turns on the sound that chimes when a

maneuver is supposed to be occurring.

Displaying small turn arrow on map

The guidance screen displayed when the vehicle

passes through an intersection can be changed.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Guidance Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight [Guidance Display Settings] and

push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(95,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5. Highlight [Small Turn Arrow on Map] and

push to activate or deactivate

Small Turn Arrow on the Map (simplified turn

indicator) displayed in the upper left corner

of the map screen. The indicator illuminates

if the Small Turn Arrow on the Map is

displayed.

Switching estimated arrival time display

The display of the travel time on the map screen

can be switched between the travel time to the

destination and the travel time to the waypoint.

Example: Switching the display to the travel time

to the waypoint

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Guidance Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight [Estimated Time] and push

.

5. Highlight [Waypoint] and push .

The indicator for the selected condition

illuminates.

6. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

7. The icon displayed on the map screen is

switched, and the travel time to the waypoint

is displayed.

Displayed icon

: Display of the travel time to the destination

: Display of the travel time to the waypoint

Set average speeds

The required time to the destination can be

calculated based on the set vehicle speeds.

Navigation 2-69

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(96,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-70 Navigation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Guidance Settings] and push

.

4. Highlight [Others] and push .

5. Highlight [Set Average Speeds] and push

.

6. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

7. Use the center dial to make an adjustment.

The speed can be increased/decreased by

5 MPH (5 km/h).

8. After finishing the setting, push

or to activate the setting.

9. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Auto]:

If set to ON, the system automatically

calculates the required time to the destina-

tion, the indicator illuminates and the speed

settings cannot be changed.

. [Freeway]:

Adjust the average vehicle speed on a

freeway.

. [Main Road]:

Adjust the average vehicle speed on a main

road.

. [Town Road]:

Adjust the average vehicle speed on a town

road.

. [Residential]:

Adjust the average vehicle speed in a

residential area.

. [Reset]:

Sets the average vehicle speeds to the

default values.

STORING LOCATION

Often visited locations can be stored in the

Address Book. The stored addresses can be

easily retrieved to set them as a destination or

waypoint.

INFO:

. The Address Book can store up to 300

locations.

. New information placed in the same storage

position will overwrite the old data.

Storing location by searching

After a location is searched for once, it can be

stored for future use.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

STORING A LOCATION/ROUTE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(97,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight [Stored Location] and push

.

5. Highlight [Home Location (None)] or [Add

New] and push .

6. Highlight the appropriate method to search

for a location and push .

Setting destination (page 2-23)

7. When a preferred location is displayed at

the center of the map, confirm the address

of the location and push .

A message is displayed, and the address of

the location is stored in the Address Book.

8. Adjust the location of the stored item and

edit the contents of the stored item as

necessary. After finishing the setting, high-

light [OK] and push .

Navigation 2-71

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(98,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-72 Navigation

INFO:

. When the location is stored in the

Address Book, [Address Book] can be

used to search for the location.

. A location can be adjusted by selecting

[Move Location] using the same method

as the one for a destination.

Moving location of destination

(page 2-46)

Other settings:

An address can also be stored using the

following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

3. Highlight [Store/Edit] and push .

4. Highlight [Add New] and push .

5. Highlight the appropriate method to search

for a location and push . The

address of the searched location is stored.

Setting destination (page 2-23)

Storing current vehicle location

1. Push to display the current loca-

tion map screen.

2. Push at the current vehicle

location.

3. Highlight [Store Location] and push

. A message is displayed, and

the current vehicle location is stored in the

Address Book.

4. The icon representing the stored location is

displayed on the map.

Push or to return to the

current location map screen.

INFO:

The location is stored in the first available

position number in the Address Book list.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(99,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Storing location by moving map

1. Move to the preferred location on the map

and push .

2. Highlight [Store Location] and push

. A message is displayed, and

the address of the location is stored in the

Address Book.

3. The icon representing the stored location is

displayed on the map.

Push to return to the current

location map screen.

INFO:

The address is stored in the first available

position number in the Address Book list.

STORING ROUTE

A maximum of 5 calculated routes can be

stored. Stored routes can be easily retrieved

and set as the suggested route.

INFO:

Stored route includes only locations (destination

and waypoints) and route calculation conditions,

not the route itself.

1. Push VOICE>.

2. Highlight [Route Info] and push .

Navigation 2-73

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(100,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-74 Navigation

3. Highl ight [Store Route] and push

.

4. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push .

The current route is stored.

Other settings

A route can also be stored using the following

procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight [Stored Routes] and push

.

5. Highlight [Store Current Route] and push

.

6. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push . The current

route is stored.

INFO:

. The route is stored in the first available

position number in the store current route

list.

. A maximum of 5 routes can be stored. When

5 routes are stored in the Address Book, a

new route cannot be stored until a route is

deleted.

Deleting stored item (page 2-86)

. If any waypoints are not set on the route, the

route cannot be stored.

STORING TRACKED ROUTE

A travelled route up to the current location can

be stored. A maximum of 5 tracked routes can

be stored.

1. Push to display the current loca-

tion map screen.

2. Push at the current vehicle

location.

3. Highlight [Store Tracking] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(101,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4. A confirmation message is displayed.

Confirm the contents of the message, high-

light [Yes] and push .

The tracked route you have traveled is

stored.

5. Push or to return to the

current location map screen.

INFO:

. A maximum of 5 tracked routes can be

stored. When 5 tracked routes are stored in

the Address Book, a new tracked route

cannot be stored until a tracked route is

deleted.

Deleting stored item (page 2-86)

. The tracked route is stored in the first

available position number in the store

tracking list.

Other settings

A tracked route can also be stored using the

following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight [Stored Tracking] and push

.

5. Highlight [Add New] and push .

INFO:

A tracked route can only be stored using the

setting screen when [Current Tracking] is set to

on.

STORING AVOID AREA

An Avoid Area can be stored.

The Avoid Area is an area that can be excluded

from a route, such as a road that is always

congested. Once Avoid Areas are stored, the

system avoids those areas when calculating a

route. Up to 10 Avoid Areas can be stored.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

Navigation 2-75

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(102,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-76 Navigation

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight [Avoid Area] and push .

5. Highlight [Add New] and push .

INFO:

A maximum of 10 Avoid Areas can be

stored.

When 10 Avoid Areas are already stored, a

new Avoid Area cannot be stored until a

currently stored Avoid Area is deleted.

Deleting stored item (page 2-86)

6. Highlight the appropriate method to search

for a location and push .

Setting destination (page 2-23)

7. Set the following items for the searched

location.

Available setting items:

. [Rename]:

Changes the name. Rename (page 2-85)

. [Move Location]:

Adjusts the location of the Avoid Area. Move Location (page 2-85)

. [Resize Area]:

Adjusts the range of the Avoid Area. Resize Area (page 2-85)

. [FWY]:

Avoids Freeways. FWY (page 2-85)

. [Delete]:

Deletes the avoid area. Delete (page 2-86)

8. After finishing the setting, highlight [OK] and

push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(103,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK

Items stored in the Address Book can be

modified. These settings can be edited to make

the navigation system more useful.

Basic operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available setting items

. [Stored Location]:

Edits the information of a stored home and

Address.

Editing stored home and address

(page 2-77)

. [Stored Routes]:

Edits the information of a stored route.

Editing stored route (page 2-82)

. [Stored Tracking]:

Edits the information of a stored tracked

route.

Editing stored tracking (page 2-83)

. [Avoid Area]:

Edits the information of a stored Avoid Area.

Editing avoid area (page 2-84)

. [Delete Stored Items]:

Deletes a stored location or route.

Deleting all stored items (page 2-88)

. [Transfer Address Book]:

Imports or exports the data of the stored

items using a USB device.

Editing stored home and address

1. Highlight [Stored Location] and push

.

2. Highlight the stored home location or pre-

ferred stored address and push .

INFO:

Highlighting [Sort] displays a list of various

sort functions.

Navigation 2-77

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(104,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-78 Navigation

3. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available setting items

. [Edit]:

Edits the stored address information.

. [Move Location]:

Adjusts the location of the stored address.

. [Delete]:

Deletes the stored address.

. [OK]:

Applies the settings.

Other settings:

A stored address can also be edited using the

following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

3. Highlight [Store/Edit] and push .

Minor adjustment of home or stored address

When [Edit] is selected, you can edit the

following items of the home or stored location

can be edited.

. [Show Icon on Map]:

. [Name] (only for stored locations):

. [Voicetag] (only for stored locations):

. [Icon]:

. [Sound]:

. [Direction]:

. [Distance]:

. [Phone No.]:

. [Group] (only for stored locations):

. [Entry Numbers] (only for stored locations):

Show Icon on Map:

Displays the home icon or the stored address

icon on the map.

1. Highlight [Show Icon on Map] and push

.

2. The indicator illuminates when the item is

set. Then the system displays the icon on

the map.

Name (only for stored locations):

Changes the name of a stored location.

1. Highlight [Name] and push .

A character input screen is displayed.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(105,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Enter the preferred name for the stored

location.

How to input letters and numbers

(page 1-14)

3. Highlight [OK] and push .

The name is stored.

Voicetag (only for stored locations):

1. Highlight [Voicetag] and push .

2. Highlight [Store] and push .

3. A beep sounds, and the system enters the

voice command reception mode.

4. Speak the name/word to be used as

Voicetag.

5. The Voicetag is stored, provided the system

recognizes it.

INFO:

. A Voicetag cannot be stored, overwritten or

played while driving.

. The Address Book can store up to 100

Voicetags.

. Highlight [Play] to confirm the stored Voice-

tag.

. Highlight [Delete] to delete a stored Voice-

tag.

. If a Voicetag is already stored, select

[Restore] to re-record the Voicetag.

Icon:

Changes the icon of the home or stored address

to the preferred one. By changing the icons, the

usage of the [By Icon] option of the sort function

can be optimized more effectively ([Sort] menu

situation).

Navigation 2-79

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(106,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-80 Navigation

1. Highlight [Icon] and push .

A list of icons is displayed.

2. Highlight the preferred icon and push

.

3. The icon is changed.

Sound:

Sets the tone of the alarm that sounds when the

vehicle approaches the home or a stored

address.

1. Highlight [Sound] and push .

A sound list is displayed.

2. Select the preferred alarm tone and push

.

The indicator of the selected alarm tone

illuminates.

Direction:

Sets the alarm to sound when approaching from

a specific direction.

1. Highlight [Direction] and push .

A map screen with the home or stored

location located on the map center is

displayed.

2. Set the direction that sounds the alarm and

push .

The selected direction is set.

INFO:

After the direction is set and [Direction] is

selected and set again, a confirmation message

is displayed. Confirm the contents of the

message, highlight [Yes] and push .

The set direction is overwritten.

Distance:

Sets the alarm to sound when reaching a

specific distance to the home or stored address.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(107,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

1. Highlight [Distance] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred distance option and

push . The indicator of the

selected distance illuminates.

Available distance options:

. 150 feet (50 m)

. 300 feet (100 m)

. 1000 feet (300 m)

. 1500 feet (500 m)

INFO:

Once the direction and the distance to sound an

alarm are set, the system will sound the alarm

when the vehicle enters the triggering zone.

Phone number:

Stores the telephone number of the home or a

stored location.

1. Highlight [Phone No.] and push .

The telephone number entry screen is

displayed.

2. Enter the telephone number of the home or

stored location.

Number input screen (page 1-15)

3. Highlight [OK] and push .

The telephone number is stored.

INFO:

If the phone number of the home or a location is

stored, the phone number can be used to search

for the destination even if it is not included in the

map data.

Group (only for stored locations):

This groups the stored locations.

By grouping the stored locations, the [By Group]

option of the sort function can be used more

effectively in the [Sort Entries] mode.

Navigation 2-81

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(108,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-82 Navigation

1. Highlight [Group] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred group and push

.

When the indicator of the selected group

illuminates, the stored location is classified

into the applicable group.

Entry Numbers (only for stored locations):

Index the position numbers of any two stored

locations in the list.

1. Highlight [Entry Numbers] and push

.

A list of stored locations is displayed.

2. Highlight the stored addresses that you

want to change and push .

The position numbers of the selected stored

locations are changed.

Editing stored route

1. Highlight [Stored Routes] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred stored route and

push .

3. Highlight the preferred item to edit from the

list on the right side of the screen and push

.

4. After finishing the editing, highlight [OK] and

push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(109,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

If [Store Current Route] is selected, the system

stores the current route.

Available setting items

. [Rename]:

Changes the name.

Character (letters and numbers) input

screen (page 1-14)

. [Replace]:

Overwrites the stored route to the current

route.

. [Delete]:

Deletes the stored route.

. [OK]:

Applies the settings.

Editing stored tracking

1. Highlight [Stored Tracking] and push

.

2. Highlight the stored tracked route and push

. When the ON indicator is not

illuminated, push . The indicator

illuminates, and the Edit screen is displayed.

If is pushed while the ON

indicator is illuminated, the indicator turns

off.

3. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available setting items (Current tracking)

. [View Track]:

Displays the tracked route up to the current

location.

. [Delete]:

Deletes the stored current tracking.

. [OK]:

Applies the settings.

Available setting items (Stored tracked

routes)

. [View Track]:

Displays a stored tracked route on the map.

. [Rename]:

Changes the name.

Character (letters and numbers) input

screen (page 1-14)

Navigation 2-83

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(110,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-84 Navigation

. [Replace]:

Overwrites the stored tracked route to the

current tracked route.

. [Delete]:

Deletes the stored tracked route.

. [OK]:

Applies the settings.

Displaying a tracked route:

The stored tracked route can be displayed on

the map as necessary.

1. Highlight [Stored Tracking] and push

.

2. Highlight a tracked route to display on the

map screen, and push . The

ON indicator illuminates, and the Edit

screen is displayed.

3. After confirming the location to display the

tracked route, highlight [OK] and push

. The screen returns to the

previous screen.

4. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

INFO:

. Current tracking is displayed up to 6

miles (10 km).

. Stored tracking is displayed up to 12

miles (20 km).

Editing avoid area

1. Highlight [Avoid Area] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred Avoid Area and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred items and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(111,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Available setting items

. [Rename]:

Changes the name.

. [Move Location]:

Adjusts the location of the Avoid Area.

. [Resize Area]:

Adjusts the range of the Avoid Area.

. [FWY]:

Avoids freeways.

. [Delete]:

Deletes the Avoid Area.

. [OK]:

Applies the setting.

4. After finishing the setting, highlight [OK] and

push .

INFO:

An Avoid Area can be added by selecting [Add

New].

Storing avoid area (page 2-75)

Rename:

Changes the name of an Avoid Area.

1. Highlight [Rename] and push . A

character input screen is displayed.

2. Enter the preferred name for the avoid area.

3. Highlight [OK] and push . The

name is stored.

Move Location:

Adjusts the location of the Avoid Area.

1. Highlight [Move Location] and push

.

2. Adjust the location of the Avoid Area.

3. After adjust ing the locat ion, push

.

Resize Area:

Adjusts the range of the Avoid Area.

1. Highl ight [Resize Area] and push

.

2. Highlight the range from 5 available levels.

3. After highl ight ing the range, push

.

FWY:

Sets the route to avoid freeways.

Navigation 2-85

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(112,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-86 Navigation

1. Highlight [FWY].

To include freeways in the Avoid Area, push

to illuminate this indicator.

2. The Avoid Area is displayed in green if it

includes a freeway or in blue if it does not

include a freeway.

INFO:

If the current vehicle location is set to an Avoid

Area, the system will not provide route guidance.

Delete:

Deletes the Avoid Area.

1. Highlight [Delete] and push .

2. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push . The stored item

is deleted from the Address Book.

DELETING STORED ITEM

The locations and routes in the Address Book

can be deleted. Two deletion methods are

available: deleting an individual item and delet-

ing all stored items.

NOTICE

Deleted items cannot be restored. Be-

fore deleting an item, always make sure

that the item is truly not necessary.

Deleting stored item individually

You can delete stored addresses, routes, track-

ing and avoid areas individually.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(113,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

Example: [Stored Location] is highlighted.

4. Highlight the preferred item for deletion and

push .

5. Highlight the preferred location/route for

deletion and push .

6. Highlight [Delete] and push .

7. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push . The stored item

is deleted from the Address Book.

Other settings:

A stored address can also be deleted using the

following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

3. Highlight [Store/Edit] and push .

4. Highlight [Edit or Delete an Entry] and push

.

5. Highlight a preferred address and push

.

Setting destination (page 2-23)

Navigation 2-87

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(114,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-88 Navigation

INFO:

This procedure applies only for deleting a stored

home or address. A stored route, tracking or

avoid area cannot be deleted using this proce-

dure.

Deleting individual item on map

1. Align the cross pointer over the preferred

stored location for deletion by moving on the

map. Then push .

2. Highlight [Delete] and push .

3. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push .

The stored item is deleted from the Address

Book.

Deleting all stored items

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight [Delete Stored Items] and push

.

5. Highlight the preferred item for deletion and

push .

Items that can be deleted

. [Delete Home Location]:

Deletes the home location.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(115,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. [Delete Address Book]:

Deletes all stored locations.

. [Delete Stored Routes]:

Deletes all stored routes.

. [Delete Current Tracking]:

Deletes the current tracked route.

. [Delete Stored Tracking]:

Deletes all stored tracked routes.

. [Delete Avoid Areas]:

Deletes all stored Avoid Areas.

. [Delete Stored Voicetags]:

Deletes all stored Voicetags.

. [Delete Previous Destinations]:

Deletes all or one of the previous destinations.

. [Delete Previous Start Point]:

Deletes all previous start points.

. [Delete Learned Route]:

Deletes all system learned routes.

6. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push . The stored items

are deleted from the Address Book.

Other settings:

All stored addresses can also be deleted using

the following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

3. Highlight [Store/Edit] and push .

4. Highlight [Delete All Addressbook Entries]

and push .

Setting destination (page 2-23)

INFO:

This procedure applies only for deleting a stored

home or address. A stored route, tracking or

avoid area cannot be deleted using this proce-

dure.

TRANSFERRING INFORMATION TO/ FROM ADDRESS BOOK

The information of the stored home and ad-

dresses can be exported and imported using a

USB device.

1. Insert a USB device and push .

Digital media slots (page 1-7)

Navigation 2-89

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(116,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-90 Navigation

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Address Book] and push

.

4. Highlight [Transfer Address Book] and push

.

5. Highlight [Download Address Book to USB]

or [Download Address Book from USB] and

push .

6. Highlight a stored item. The [ON] indicator

illuminates.

7. Highlight [Download] and push .

NOTICE

Do not remove the USB device until the

system completely imports or exports

the data.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(117,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

If the USB device already has the data for a

stored address, a confirmation message is

displayed. Once overwritten, the original data

cannot be recovered.

The navigation system can be set in details to

meet the preference.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push .

Available setting items

. [Address Book]:

Store locations and routes, and edit the

stored items.

Storing location (page 2-70)

. [Map View]:

Set the display method and the direction of

the map.

Changing map view (page 2-11)

. [Map Icons]:

Set the map icons to display on the map.

Displaying map icons (page 2-17)

. [Guidance Settings]:

Set the various functions for the route

guidance.

Guidance settings (page 2-61)

. [Route Settings]:

Change the routing preferences.

Detailed route settings (page 2-65)

. [Traffic Info Settings]:

Set the various functions of the NavTraffic

information system.

Traffic information settings

(page 6-11)

. [Weather Info Setting]:

Set the functions of the NavWeatherXM

information system.

Weather information settings

(page 6-20)

. [Speed Limit Info]:

Display speed limit information.

Speed limit indication on map

(page 2-92)

. [Others]:

Display other setting items.

Other navigation settings

(page 2-92)

Navigation 2-91

NAVIGATION SETTING

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(118,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-92 Navigation

. [Delete Stored Information]:

Delete stored locations and the home

setting in the Address Book.

Delete stored items (page 2-96)

. [Delete All Previous Destinations]:

Delete all previous destinations.

Delete stored items (page 2-96)

. [Delete Previous Starting Point]:

Delete all previous starting points.

Delete stored items (page 2-96)

. [Reset All Navigation Settings to Default]:

Reset all of the settings to default.

Reset all navigation settings to de-

fault (page 2-96)

SPEED LIMIT INDICATION ON MAP

Turn the [Speed Limit Info] display on or off. The

indicator light illuminates when the speed limit

display function is set to on.

1. Highlight [Speed Limit Info] and push

.

2. Highlight [Speed Limit Indication on Map] to

toggle the function between on and off. The

indicator light illuminates when the speed

limit display function is set to on.

OTHER NAVIGATION SETTINGS

Basic Operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Others] and push .

4. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push .

Available setting items

. [Audio Display on Map]:

Allows the audio information to be displayed

at all times.

Displaying audio information on map

screen (page 2-93)

. [Small Step Zoom by Dial]:

Sets the free zoom function on or off. When

this setting is on, it is possible to adjust the

scale in smaller steps than with normal scale

adjustment.

. [Map Scrolling Information]:

Sets the system so that when the map

scrolls the information about the location

aligned at the center of the cross pointer is

displayed.

Map scrolling information

(page 2-18)

. [Customize Nearby Places]:

Set the category of frequently visited land-

marks.

Customizing Nearby Places

(page 2-93)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(119,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. [Keyboard Type]:

Switches the keyboard layout for the char-

acter input screen.

Settings keyboard layout of character

input screen (page 2-94)

. [North Up when Zoom Out]:

When this setting is ON, the orientation of

the map is automatically changed to North

Up when the widest map scale is selected.

The orientation is changed to North Up even

when Heading Up is set.

. [Adjust Current Location]:

Corrects the position of the current location.

Adjusting current vehicle location

(page 2-95)

Displaying audio information on map screen

The operating status of audio functions can be

displayed on the map screen.

1. Highlight [Others] and push .

2. Highlight [Audio Display on Map] and push

. The indicator illuminates when

the item is set.

3. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

4. On the bottom of the map screen, the

operating status of an audio/visual function

is displayed at all times.

Customizing Nearby Places

The categories can be customized for searching

places of interest nearby.

The modified list of places of interest can be

used for searching for a location using [Places].

Finding place (page 2-27)

1. Highlight [Others] and push .

2. Highlight [Customize Nearby Places] and

push .

3. Highlight the preferred item and push

. The main category list is dis-

played.

Navigation 2-93

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(120,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-94 Navigation

4. Highlight a main category and push

. The sub category list is dis-

played. Highlight [Category Search] and

push . The preferred category

can also be input directly.

5. Highlight a sub category and push

. The category setting is mod-

ified.

6. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Settings keyboard layout of charac- ter input screen

Depending on the users preference for the

keyboard layout of character input screen, the

ABC layout or QWERTY layout can be selected.

Example: Switching to the QWERTY layout

1. Highlight [Others] and push .

2. Highlight [Keyboard Type] and push

.

3. Highlight [QWERTY] and push .

The indicator illuminates when the item is

set.

4. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

ABC layout

QWERTY layout

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(121,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Adjusting current vehicle location

If the vehicle icon indicating the current vehicle

location is not in the correct position, the

location of the vehicle icon on the map screen

can be adjusted.

INFO:

. Regardless of the map view setting, the map

is displayed in Plan View when adjusting the

position of the vehicle icon.

. When correcting the position of the vehicle

icon, the map is automatically displayed in

the North Up mode. After finishing the

correction, the map restores the current

orientation setting.

. The position and direction of the vehicle icon

may be misaligned depending on the

external conditions and environment.

. If the vehicle icon is misaligned, drive for a

while in a location where the GPS signals

can be received. This may correct the

position of the vehicle icon.

Vehicle icon (page 12-4)

1. Highlight [Others] and push .

2. Highlight [Adjust Current Location] and

push . The current location map

screen is displayed.

3. Adjust the position of the vehicle icon.

After adjusting the position of the vehicle

icon, push .

4. Adjust the direction of the vehicle icon.

After adjusting the direction of the vehicle

icon, push .

5. A message is displayed, and the adjusted

vehicle location is stored.

Navigation 2-95

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(122,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2-96 Navigation

DELETE STORED ITEMS

Delete stored item from setting screen.

Basic Operation

1. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

2. Highlight the preferred item that you want to

delete and push .

Available items

. [Deletes Stored Information]:

Delete the stored location and home.

. [Delete All Previous Destinations]:

Delete all previous destinations.

. [Delete Previous Start Point]:

Delete all previous start point.

RESET ALL NAVIGATION SETTINGS TO DEFAULT

This restores various settings (display, volume

level, etc.) to the default settings.

INFO:

The memory contents, such as the stored

locations, will not be deleted.

1. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

2. Highlight [Reset All Navigation Settings to

Default] and push .

3. A confirmation message is displayed. Con-

firm the contents of the message, highlight

[Yes] and push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(123,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3 Audio system

Audio system .............................................................................. 3-2

Audio operation precautions............................................. 3-2

Antenna ............................................................................... 3-11

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player ......................................................................... 3-11

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation............ 3-15

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port ........... 3-17

Bluetooth streaming audio ......................................... 3-21

iPod player operation .................................................. 3-24

CD/DVD/USB device care and cleaning ................. 3-26

Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 3-26

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(124,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-2 Audio system

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the radio band select button

to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with

the engine not running, the ignition switch

should be pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception:

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other

vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to the

distance between the transmitter and receiver.

FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting

many of the same characteristics as light. For

example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other,

resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(125,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also

subject to interference as they travel from

transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception:

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a

malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the

satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any

metal or large building for the satellite radio to

receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The sa-

tellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

The satellite radio performance may be affected

if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Compact Disc (CD) player

. Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD and/

or CD changer/player.

. Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed

could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

Audio system 3-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(126,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-4 Audio system

. During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or

ventilate the player completely.

. The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

. The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging.

. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,

covered with fingerprints, or that have pin

holes may not work properly.

. The following CDs may not work properly:

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

. Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction.

3.1 in (8 cm) discs

CDs that are not round

CDs with a paper label

CDs that are warped, scratched, or have

abnormal edges

. This audio system can only play prerecorded

CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn

CDs.

. If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature inside

the player is too high. Remove the CD by

pushing the EJECT button, and after a short

time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played

when the temperature of the player returns

to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system

(only MP3, WMA or AAC CD).

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player

. Do not force a compact disc into the CD/

DVD insert slot. This could damage the CD/

DVD player.

. During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CD/DVD and dehumidify

or ventilate the player completely.

. The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(127,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot

function when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. Decrease the

temperature before use.

. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO or DVD Video logo on the

disc or packaging.

. Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct

sunlight.

. CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that

have pinholes may not work properly.

. The following CD/DVDs are not guaranteed

to play:

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Recordable DVDs (DVDR, DVDR DL)

Rewritable DVDs (DVDRW, DVDRW

DL)

. Do not use the following CD/DVDs as they

may cause the CD/DVD player to malfunc-

tion.

3.1 in (8 cm) discs

CD/DVDs that are not round

CD/DVDs with a paper label

CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched or

have abnormal edges

This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CD/DVDs. It has no capabilities

to record or burn CD/DVDs.

. If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

Disc Read Error:

Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

This may be an error due to the

temperature inside the player being too

high. Remove the CD/DVD by pushing

the EJECT button, and after a short time

reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can

be played when the temperature of the

player returns to normal. If the error

persists, consult your local dealership.

Unplayable File:

The file may be copy protected.

The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or

DivX type.

Region Invalid:

The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions.

Use DVDs with a region code 1, ALL

or 1 included for your DVD entertain-

ment system. (The region code *A is

displayed as a small symbol printed on

the top of the DVD *B .) This vehicle-

installed DVD player cannot play DVDs

with a region code other than 1 or

ALL.

Copyright and trademark:

. The technology protected by the U.S. patent

and other intellectual property rights owned

by Macrovision Corporation and other right

holders is adopted for this system.

. This copyright protected technology cannot

be used without a permit from Macrovision

Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,

etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision

Corporation is not issued.

. Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

. Dolby digital is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

. Dolby and the double D mark are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are

registered trademarks of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

Audio system 3-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(128,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-6 Audio system

Parental level (parental control):

DVDs with the parental control setting can be

played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection:

The following disc formats can be played with

the DVD drive.

. DVD-VIDEO

. VIDEO-CD

. CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)

. DTS-CD

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connec- tion port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

. Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling the USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

. Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately

as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some states/area, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without images for

regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is

parked.

This system supports various USB devices,

USB hard drives and iPod players. Some

USB devices may not be supported by this

system.

. Partitioned USB devices may not be played

correctly.

. Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on display. Using English language

characters with a USB device is recom-

mended.

General notes for USB use:

Refer to your device manufacturers owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod use:

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

. Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod

is connected properly.

. An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(129,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

. An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod

nano (2nd Generation)

. Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod.

. Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod. The vehicle center display may

momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

. If an iPod automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

center display may momentarily black out,

but will soon recover.

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/ WMA/AAC/ATRAC3)

Explanation of terms:

. MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near CD

quality sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. The compression

reduces certain parts of sound that seem

inaudible to most people.

. WMA Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

. AAC/M4A Advanced Audio Coding

(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.

Audio files that have been encoded with

AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver

a higher quality of sound than MP3.

. Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

. Sampling frequency Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

. Multisession Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

. ID3/WMA Tag The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows and Windows Media are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

Audio system 3-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(130,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-8 Audio system

Playback order:

. The folder names of folders not containing

compressed audio files are not shown in the

display.

. If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,

Root Folder is displayed.

. The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

. Music playback order of compressed audio

files is as illustrated in the figure.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(131,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDR DL, USB2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDR DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 * VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB device: FAT16, FAT32

Supported versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

AAC

Version MPEG-AAC

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz

Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Audio system 3-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(132,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-10 Audio system

Compressed Video Files

Explanation of terms:

. DivX - DivX refers to the DivX codec

owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy

compression of video based on MPEG-4.

. AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.

It is a standard file format originated by

Microsoft Corporation. A .divx encoded file

can be saved into the .avi file format for

playback on this system if it meets the

requirements stated in the table in this

section. However, not all the .avi files are

playable on this system since different

encodings can be used than the DivX

codec.

. ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems

Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft

Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet

the requirements stated in the table in this

section can be played.

. Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital video file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

Requirement for Supporting Video Playback:

Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDRW DL, USB 2.0 Memory

File Systems CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDRW DL

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 - ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. - Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. - VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB Device FAT16, FAT32

File Types .divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6

Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM

.asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4

Audio Codec G.726

Bit Rates .divx, .avi Maximum Average 4Mbps

Maximum Peak 8Mbps

Resolution .divx, .avi Minimum 32 6 32

Maximum 720 6 480

.asf Minimum 32 6 32

Maximum 720 6 576

Bluetooth streaming audio

. Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

. It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible Blue-

tooth audio device and the in-vehicle

Bluetooth module before using the Blue-

tooth streaming audio.

. Operating procedure of the Bluetooth

streaming audio will vary depending on the

device. Make sure it is understood how to

operate an audio device before using it with

this system.

. The Bluetooth streaming audio may be

stopped under the following conditions:

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(133,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Receiving a hands-free call.

Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

. Do not place a Bluetooth audio device in

an area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle Bluetooth module to

prevent tone quality degradation and wire-

less connection disruption.

. While an audio device is connected through

a Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

. This system supports the Bluetooth Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Blue-

tooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Clarion Co.,

Ltd.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

. Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any

metal parts to it. This may cause

poor reception or noise.

. When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with

a dampened soft cloth.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COM- PACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

The satellite radio mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The sa-

tellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing the SiriusXM Satellite

Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an

available channel list will be automatically

updated in the radio. Push the ignition switch

from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

ONOFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push ONOFF>

while the system is off to turn on the last audio

source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing

ONOFF> turns the system off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio system 3-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(134,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-12 Audio system

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-

ance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio control knob. When the display shows

the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,

Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control

knob to set the desired setting.

Audio settings (page 7-3)

Switching the display:

Pushing will switch the displays

as follows:

iPod/USB ? CD/DVD ? Bluetooth stream-

ing audio ? AUX (if so equipped) ? iPod/

USB

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

FM/AM radio band select:

Pushing will change the band as

follows:

AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM

SiriusXM Satellite Radio band select:

Pushing will change the band as

follows:

XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1

When or is pushed while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the channel last played.

The last channel played will also come on when

the ONOFF button is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when

or is turned to ON, the

audio source will automatically be turned off and

the last radio channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

. For AM and FM radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning.

. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels

from all of the categories when any category

is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY (CAT):

. For AM and FM radio

Push < > or < > to tune from low to

high or high to low frequencies and to stop

at the next broadcasting station.

. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Push < > or < > to tune to the first

channel of the next or previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain condi-

tions.

. NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

. OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

. CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection

error)

. LOADING (When the initial setting is

performed)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(135,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

SCAN tuning:

Push to tune from low to high

frequencies and stop at each broadcasting

station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing the

button again during this 5 seconds period will

stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station/channel.

If is not pushed within 5 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next station/channel.

*1 to *6 Station memory operations:

12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band

(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for SiriusXM

Satellite Radio (6 each for XM1, XM2 and XM3)

and 6 stations can be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band

select button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel using

< >, < >, or the radio

TUNE knob.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset

button *1 to *6 until the radio mutes.

4. The station indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations/channels.

List (AM and FM radio):

When [List] on the display is selected while the

FM or AM radio is being played, the preset

station list will be displayed.

If one of the 6 preset stations listed is touched

and held, the current station will be stored as the

new preset.

Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio):

When [Menu] on the display is selected while

the SiriusXM Satellite Radio is being played, the

menu list will be displayed.

The following items are available.

. Preset List

Displays the preset channel list. If one of the

6 preset stations listed is touched and held,

the current station will be stored as the new

preset.

. Customize Channel List

Selects specific channels to skip while using

the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or Menu-

Categories feature.

. Favorite Artists & Songs

Stores the current artist or song that is being

played. Touch [Alert] to be reminded when

the stored artist or song is playing on a

station while listening to SiriusXM Satellite

Radio.

. Categories

Selecting a category will go to the first

channel in that category as defined by

SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

. Direct Tune

Inputs the channel number by using a

keypad.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into

the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will

be guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

Audio system 3-13

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(136,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-14 Audio system

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on

the CD and the play time will appear on the

display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the ONOFF button will

start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

PLAY:

When is pushed with the system

off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on

and the CD will start to play.

When is pushed with the CD

loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start

to play.

Menu:

When [Menu] on the display is selected while

the CD is being played, the menu screen will be

displayed. The following menu options are

available.

. Folder List (for CD with compressed audio

files)

Displays the folder list.

. Track List

Displays the track list.

. Play Mode

Select a play mode from the following items.

Normal

1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com-

pressed audio files)

1 Track Repeat

1 Disc Random

1 Folder Random (for CD with com-

pressed audio files)

Next/Previous Track and Fast Forward/

Rewind:

When < > (fast forward) or < > (rewind)

is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the

CD is being played, the CD will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the CD will return to normal play

speed.

When < > or < > is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the

next track or the beginning of the current track

on the CD will be played.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When RPT> is pushed while the CD is

played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

(CD with compressed audio files)

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(137,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) PLAYER OPERATION

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-

ment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front display

while the vehicle is in any drive position to

reduce driver distraction. Audio is available

when a movie is played. To view movies in the

front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,

move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and

apply the parking brake.

WARNING

. The driver must not attempt to

operate the DVD system or wear

the headphones while the vehicle is

in motion so that full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

. Do not attempt to modify the system

to display a movie on the front

screen while the vehicle is being

driven. Doing so may distract the

driver and may cause a collision and

serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

. Only operate the DVD while the

vehicle engine is running. Operating

the DVD for extended periods of

time with the engine OFF can dis-

charge the vehicle battery.

. Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled

liquids may cause the system to

malfunction.

. While playing VIDEO-CD media, this

DVD player does not guarantee

complete functionality of all VI-

DEO-CD formats.

Display settings

To adjust the front display mode, push

while the DVD is being played,

select [Others] and then select [Display].

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,

color and contrast, select [Display Adjustment]

and then select each key.

Then you can adjust each item using the center

dial. After changes have been made push

to save the setting.

Playing a DVD

DISCAUX button:

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the DVD

drive while watching the images.

Push on the instrument panel

and turn the display to the DVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed

automatically.

The operation screen will be turned on when

located on the instrument panel

is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it

will turn off automatically after a period of time.

To turn it on again, push again.

DVD operation keys:

When the DVD is playing without the operation

screen being shown, you may use the touch

screen to select items from the displayed video.

You may also use the center dial to select an

Audio system 3-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(138,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-16 Audio system

item from the displayed video. When the

operation screen is being shown, use the center

dial or touch screen to select an item from the

displayed menus.

PAUSE:

Select [ ] to pause the DVD. To resume

playing the DVD, use [PLAY].

PLAY:

Select [ ] to start playing the DVD, for

example, after pausing the DVD.

STOP:

Select [ ] to stop playing the DVD.

/ Next/Previous Chapter:

Select [ ] or [ ] to skip the chapter(s) of

the disc forward/backward. The chapters will

advance/go back the number of times this key is

selected.

/ Commercial Skip:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR.

Select [ ] or [ ] to skip forward or

backwards by the set amount as defined in the

DVD Settings menu.

Top Menu:

When [Top Menu] is selected in the screen

while a DVD is being played, the top menu

specific to each disc will be displayed. For

details, see the instructions on the disc.

DVD settings

Example

Select [Settings] to adjust the following settings.

Key (DVD-VIDEO):

Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.

: Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.

Enter: Enter the selected menu.

Move: Change the display location by moving

the operation key.

Back: Return to the previous screen.

Hide: Hide the operation key.

Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO):

Some menus specific to each disc will be

shown. For details, see the instructions on the

disc.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

The scene with the specified title will be

displayed each time the [+] side or [] side is

selected.

Group Search (VIDEO CD):

A scene in the specified group will be displayed

each time the [+] side or [] side is selected.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,CD-

DA, DVD-VR):

Select [10 Key Search] to open the number

entry screen. Input the number to be searched

and select [OK]. The specified Title/Chapter or

Group/Track will be played.

Select No. (VIDEO-CD):

Select [Select No.] to open the number entry

screen. Input the number to be searched and

select [OK]. The specified scene will be played.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO):

If the DVD contains different angles (such as

moving images), the current image angle can be

switched to another one. Select [Angle]. The

angle will change each time the [+] side or []

side is selected.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(139,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will

be shown on the bottom of the screen if the

scene can be seen from a different angle.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

DVD menus are automatically configured and

the contents will be played directly when [Menu

Skip] is turned on. Note that some discs may not

be played directly even if this item is turned on.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

Select [CM Skip]. Choose the setting time from

15, 30 or 60 seconds by selecting the [+] side

or [] side.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automati-

cally adjusts the soundtrack volume level to

maintain a more even sound to the speakers.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):

Select [DVD Language] to open the number

entry screen. Input the number corresponding to

the preferred language and select [OK]. The

DVD top menu language will be changed to the

one specified.

Display:

To adjust the image quality of the screen, select

the preferred adjustment items.

Audio:

Select the preferred language for audio.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

Select the preferred language for subtitles.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,

DVD-VR):

Select from the Full, Wide, Normal or

Cinema modes.

Title List (DVD-VR):

Select the preferred title from the list.

Play Mode:

Select the preferred play mode.

PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR):

Select the PG or PL mode.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CON- NECTION PORT

Audio main operation

Open the console lid and connect a USB device

as illustrated. Then, push re-

peatedly to switch to the USB device mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

device was playing, pushing ONOFF>

will start the USB device.

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

Audio system 3-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(140,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-18 Audio system

CAUTION

. Depending on size and shape of

USB device, the console lid may not

fully close. Do not force console lid

closed as this may damage USB

device.

. Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the USB device and

the port. Make sure that the USB

device is connected correctly into

the USB port. (Some USB devices

come with a mark as a guide.

Make sure that the mark is facing

the correct direction before insert-

ing the device.)

. Do not locate objects near the USB

device to prevent the objects from

leaning on the USB device and the

port. Pressure from the objects may

damage the USB device and the

port.

File selection

When there are both audio and movie files in the

USB device, the mode select screen is dis-

played. Select the preferred contents to play.

When there is only one type of file, the audio or

movie operation screen is displayed and starts

to play.

If a video file restricts the number of playbacks, a

pop-up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to

play. Answer yes or no as requested by the

display.

Audio file operation

PLAY:

When is pushed with the system

off and the USB device inserted, the system will

turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB

device is inserted, push repeat-

edly until the center display changes to the USB

device mode.

Next/Previous File and Fast Forward/Re-

wind:

When < > (Rewind) or < > (Fast For-

ward) is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while a USB device is being played, the USB

device will play while forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the USB device

will return to normal play speed.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(141,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

When < > or < > is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the USB device is being

played, the next track or the beginning of the

current track on the USB device will be played.

The center dial can also be used to select tracks

when the USB device is being played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB device,

turn the folder selector or choose a folder

displayed on the screen using the center dial.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When RPT> is pushed while the USB

device is played, the play pattern can be change

as follows.

To change the play mode, push RPT>

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?

All Random ? 1 Folder Random ? Normal

Menu:

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following options that

are displayed on the screen if necessary. Refer

to the following information for each item.

. Movie Playback

Switch to the movie playback mode. This

item is displayed only when a USB device

contains movie files.

. Folder List/Track List

Displays the folder or track list. [Movie

Playback] is also displayed in this list screen,

and enables switching to the movie playback

mode.

. Play Mode

Select the preferred play mode.

Movie file operation

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the USB

device while watching the images.

PLAY:

When is pushed with the system

off and the USB device inserted, the system will

turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB

device is inserted, push repeat-

edly until the center display changes to the USB

device mode.

Operation keys:

To operate the USB device, select the desired

key displayed on the operation screen using the

center dial.

Pause

Audio system 3-19

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(142,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-20 Audio system

Select [ ] to pause the movie file. To resume

playing the movie file, select [ ].

Play

Select [ ] to start playing a movie file, for

example, after pausing a movie file.

STOP

Select [ ] to stop playing a movie file.

Skip (Next chapter)

Select [ ] to skip the chapter(s) of the disc

forward. The chapters will advance the number

of times is pushed.

Skip (Previous chapter)

Select [ ] to skip the chapter(s) of the disc

backward. The chapters will go back the number

of times [ ] is selected.

List:

Select [List] on the movie file operation screen

to display the file list.

Example

Settings:

Select [Settings] to adjust the following set-

tings.

. Audio File Playback

Switch to the audio playback mode. This

item is displayed only when the USB device

contains the audio files.

. Play Mode

Select the Normal or 1 Track Repeat play

mode.

. 10 Key Search

Select [10 Key Search] to open the number

entry screen.

Input the number to be searched and select

[OK].

The specified folder/file will be played.

. Display

To adjust the image quality of the screen,

select the preferred adjustment items.

. DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-

matically adjusts the soundtrack volume

level to maintain a more even sound to the

speakers.

. Audio

Select the preferred language for audio.

. Subtitle

Select the preferred language for subtitle.

. Display Mode

Select the Normal, Wide, Cinema or

Full mode.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(143,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth

Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible

Bluetooth device with streaming audio (A2DP

profile), you can set up the wireless connection

between your Bluetooth device and the in-

vehicle audio system. This connection allows

you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth

device using your vehicle speakers. It also may

allow basic control of the device for playing and

skipping audio files using the AVRCP Blue-

tooth profile. All Bluetooth Devices do not

have the same level of controls for AVRCP.

Please consult the manual for your Bluetooth

Device for more details.

Once your Bluetooth device is connected to

the in-vehicle audio system, it will automatically

reconnect whenever the device is present in the

vehicle and you select Bluetooth Audio from

your audio system. You do not need to manually

reconnect for each usage.

Regulatory information

FCC Regulatory information:

. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information:

. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

. This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li- censed to Clarion Co., Ltd

Connecting procedure

1. Push and select [Bluetooth].

2. Select [Connect Bluetooth].

Audio system 3-21

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(144,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-22 Audio system

3. A confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select [No].

Note: Selecting [Yes] will connect the hands

free phone portion of a Bluetooth device.

4. After selecting MY-CAR on the Bluetooth

audio device, perform one of the following

procedures.

. Choose a PIN code to use with the

compatible Bluetooth audio device

using the number input screen.

. Check that the PIN code displayed on the

screen is the same as the number

displayed on the Bluetooth audio de-

vice, and select [Yes].

The PIN code will need to be entered into

the Bluetooth audio device after step 5.

Select [OK].

5. The standby message screen will appear.

Operate the compatible Bluetooth audio

device. Please refer to the devices owners

manual for the Bluetooth audio connection

instructions for your specific device.

When the connection is completed, the

screen will return to the Bluetooth setup

display.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push repeatedly

to switch to the Bluetooth audio mode. If the

system has been turned off while the Bluetooth

audio device was playing, pushing the ONOFF/

VOL control knob will start the Bluetooth audio

device.

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward,

rewind, randomize and repeat music may be

different between devices. Some or all of these

functions may not be supported on each device.

DISCAUX button:

When is pushed with the system

off and the Bluetooth audio device connected,

the system will turn on. If another audio source is

playing and the Bluetooth audio device is

connected, push repeatedly until

the display changes to the Bluetooth audio

mode.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(145,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Next/Previous Track and Fast Forward/

Rewind:

When < > or < > is pushed for more than

1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth audio file is

being played, the Bluetooth audio device will

play while forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the Bluetooth audio device

will return to normal play speed.

When < > or < > is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth audio file is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the Bluetooth audio device

will be played. The center dial can also be used

to select tracks when the Bluetooth audio play

mode screen is shown on the display. (Blue-

tooth audio will be indicated on the header of

the screen.)

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

To change the play mode, push RPT>

repeatedly and the mode changes as follows.

Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Shuffle Group

? Repeat 1 Track ? Repeat All Tracks ?

Repeat Group ? Normal

Operation keys:

To operate a Bluetooth audio device, select a

key displayed on the operation screen using the

center dial.

Play

Select [ ] to start playing when pausing.

Select this key again to pause the audio play.

Pause

Select [ ] to pause the Bluetooth audio

device. Select this key again to resume playing.

Play Mode:

The play mode setting display will appear when

[Menu] is selected.

Choose the preferred play mode from the

following items.

. Shuffle

Choose Shuffle OFF, Shuffle All Tracks

and Shuffle Group.

. Repeat

Choose from Repeat OFF, Repeat 1

Track, Repeat All Tracks and Repeat

Group.

Bluetooth settings

To set up the Bluetooth device system to the

preferred settings, push and

select [Bluetooth].

Bluetooth:

If this setting is turned off, the connection

between the Bluetooth devices and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth module will be canceled.

Connect Bluetooth:

Connects to the Bluetooth device. Up to 5

devices can be registered.

Connecting procedure (page 3-21)

Connected Devices:

Registered devices are shown on the list. Select

a Bluetooth device from the list, the following

options will be available.

Audio system 3-23

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(146,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-24 Audio system

. Select

Select [Select] to connect the selected

device to the vehicle. If there is a different

device currently connected, the selected

device will replace the current device.

. Edit

Rename the selected Bluetooth device

using the keypad displayed on the screen.

How to input letters and numbers

(page 1-14)

. Delete

Delete the selected Bluetooth device.

Edit Bluetooth Info:

Change the name broadcasted by this system

over Bluetooth. Change the PIN code that is

entered when connecting a hands free device to

this system.

Replace Connected Phone:

Replace the Bluetooth connection with a

connected Bluetooth cellular phone.

4. Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem

iPod PLAYER OPERATION

Connecting iPod

Open the console lid and connect the iPod

cable to the USB connector. If the iPod

supports charging via USB, the battery of the

iPod will be charged while connected to the

vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod, the

display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or

Accessory Attached screen when the connec-

tion is completed. When the iPod is connected

to the vehicle, the iPod music library can only

be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Depending on size and shape of

iPod and iPod cable, the console

lid may not fully close. Do not force

console lid closed as this may

damage iPod and iPod cable.

. Do not force the iPod cable into

the USB port. Inserting the iPod

cable tilted or up-side-down into the

port may damage the iPod cable

and the port. Make sure that the

iPod cable is connected correctly

into the USB port. (Some iPod

cable come with a mark as a

guide. Make sure that the mark is

facing the correct direction before

inserting the iPod cable.)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(147,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. Do not locate objects near the iPod

cable to prevent the objects from

leaning on the iPod cable and the

port. Pressure from the objects may

damage the iPod cable and the

port.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

. Fifth generation iPod (version 1.2.3 or

later)

. iPod Classic (version 1.1.1 or later)

. First generation iPod touch (version 2.0.0

or later)

. Second generation iPod touch (version

1.2.3 or later)

. First generation iPod nano (version 1.3.1 or

later)

. Second generation iPod nano (version

1.1.3 or later)

. Third generation iPod nano (version 1.1 or

later)

. Fourth generation iPod nano (version 1.0.2

or later)

Make sure that the iPod version is updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push repeatedly

to switch to the iPod mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod

was playing, pushing the ONOFF button will

start the iPod.

PLAY:

When is pushed with the system

off and the iPod connected, the system will turn

on. If another audio source is playing and the

iPod is connected, push re-

peatedly until the center display changes to the

iPod mode.

Interface:

The interface for iPod operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod

interface. Use the center dial and or

to play the iPod with your favorite

settings.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information about

each item, see the iPod Owners Manual.

. Now Playing

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Songs

. Podcasts

. Genres

. Composers

. Audiobooks

. Shuffle Songs

The following touch-panel buttons shown on the

screen are also available:

. : returns to the previous screen.

. : plays/pauses the music selected.

Next/Previous Track and Fast Forward/

Rewind:

When < > or < > is pushed for more than

1.5 seconds while the iPod is playing, the

iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewind-

ing. When the button is released, the iPod will

return to the normal play speed.

When < > or < > is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the iPod is playing, the next

track or the beginning of the current track on the

iPod will be played.

The center dial can also be used to select tracks

when the iPod is playing.

Audio system 3-25

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(148,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-26 Audio system

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When RPT> is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

CD/DVD/USB DEVICE CARE AND CLEANING

CD/DVD

. Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch

the surface of the disc. Do not bend the

disc.

. Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

. A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB device

. Never touch the terminal portion of the USB

device.

. Do not place heavy objects on the USB

device.

. Do not store the USB device in highly humid

locations.

. Do not expose the USB device to direct

sunlight.

. Do not spill any liquids on the USB device.

Refer to the USB device Owners Manual for the

details.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

. A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation. Some jurisdictions prohi-

bit the use of cellular phones while

driving.

. If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recom-

mended. Exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

. If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

CAR PHONE or CB RADIO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(149,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

CAUTION

. Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

. Keep the antenna wire more than 8

in (20 cm) away from the electronic

control system harness. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any

harness.

. Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the man-

ufacturer.

. Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

. For details, consult your NISSAN

dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer.

Audio system 3-27

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(150,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3-28 Audio system

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(151,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ............................... 4-2

Regulatory information ........................................................ 4-3

Voice commands.................................................................. 4-3

Control buttons .................................................................... 4-4

Connecting procedure........................................................ 4-4

Phone selection.................................................................... 4-4

Quick Dial ............................................................................ 4-5

Making a call ....................................................................... 4-6

Receiving a call .................................................................. 4-7

During a call ........................................................................ 4-7

Phone setting...................................................................... 4-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(152,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4-2 Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

WARNING

. Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

. If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular

phone, you can set up the wireless connection

between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module. With Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology, you can make or receive a telephone call

with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Once a cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no phone connecting

procedure is required anymore. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position with the registered

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-

ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone

number using your voice is possible.

8. Voice recognition

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

. Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

. Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

. You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, behind a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

Your cellular phone is locked in order not

to be dialed.

. When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other persons voice

during a call.

. Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

. Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

. While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual.

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(153,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. If the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

. Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

. Refer to the cellular phone Owners Manual

regarding the telephone pairing procedure

specific to your phone, battery charging,

cellular phone antenna, etc.

. The antenna display on the monitor will not

coincide with the antenna display of some

cellular phones.

. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the callers voice clearly as

well as to minimize its echoes.

. If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing call

volume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. this device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

. This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

8. Voice recognition

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System 4-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(154,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4-4 Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

CONTROL BUTTONS

&1 PHONE button

&2 button

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

1. Push or < >, and select

[Connect Phone].

2. A message screen is displayed. Operate the

cellular phone according to the message,

and then wait until MY-CAR is displayed

on the cellular phone. After selecting MY-

CAR on your cellular phone, perform one of

the following procedures.

. Input the PIN code displayed on the

screen.

. Check that the PIN code displayed on the

screen is the same as the number

displayed on the cellular phone, and then

select [Yes].

For phones that support Simple Secure Pairing (SSP), check that the PIN code on the vehicle display matches the PIN code displayed on the phone.

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone. See the cellular phone Owners

Manual for the details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for

instructions on pairing NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

When the connection process is completed,

the screen will return to the Phone menu

display.

PHONE SELECTION

Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the

system. To switch to connect another cellular

phone, push and select [Connected

Phone]. The registered cellular phones are

shown on the list. If you select a cellular phone

that is different from the one currently con-

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(155,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

nected, the newly selected phone will be

connected to the system.

QUICK DIAL

This vehicle has two phonebooks available for

hands-free use. Depending on the phone, the

system may automatically download the entire

cell phones phonebook into the Phonebook.

Phone setting (page 4-7)

If a phonebook does not automatically down-

load, the quick dial may be set for up to 1,000

entries. This phonebook allows the recording of

a name to speak while using voice recognition.

1. Push and select [Quick Dial].

2. Select [Add New] at the top of the screen.

3. Choose the method for entering the phone-

book entry. For this example, select [Enter

Number by Keypad].

4. Enter the digits and select [OK].

How to input letters and numbers

(page 1-14)

5. Select [Voicetag] to record a name to speak

when using NISSAN Voice Recognition

system.

6. Select [Store] and prepare to speak the

name after the tone.

7. When the voicetag is successfully saved,

select [OK] to save the phonebook entry.

8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will

show a screen that is ready to call the

number. Press to return to the

quick dial.

There are different methods to input a phone

number. Select one of the following options

instead of [Enter Number by Keypad] in step 3.

. [Copy from Call History]:

The system will show a list of incoming,

outgoing or missed calls that were down-

loaded from the connected cellular phone

(depending on the phones compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the

quick dial.

. [Copy from the Handset]:

The system will show the connected cellular

phones phonebook that was downloaded

(depending on the phones compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the

quick dial.

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System 4-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(156,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4-6 Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

Editing the Quick Dial

1. Push and select [Quick Dial].

2. Select the desired entry from the displayed

list.

3. Select [Edit].

4. Select the desired item to change.

The following editing items are available:

. [Entry #]:

Changes the displayed number of the

selected entry.

. [Name]:

Edit the name of the entry using the keypad

displayed on the screen.

. [Number]:

Edit the phone number using the keypad

displayed on the screen.

. [Type]:

Select an icon from the icon list.

. [Voicetag]:

Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags

allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice

Recognition system.

8. Voice recognition

To delete an entry, select [Delete] at step 3.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow this procedure.

1. Push or < >. The PHONE

screen will appear on the display.

2. Select [Phonebook] on the PHONE menu.

3. Select the desired entry from the list.

4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting for the

correct number from the list.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead of

[Phonebook] in step 2 above.

. [Quick Dial]:

Select an entry stored in the quick dial.

. [Call History]:

Select an outgoing, incoming or missed call

downloaded from your cell phone (depend-

ing on your phones compatibility).

. [Dial Number]:

Input the phone number manually using the

keypad displayed on the screen.

How to input letters and numbers

(page 1-14)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(157,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to the incoming call mode. To receive a

call, perform one of the following procedures

listed below.

1. Select [Answer].

2. Push on the instrument panel.

3. Push < > on the steering wheel.

There are some options available when receiving

a call. Select one of the following displayed on

the screen.

. [Answer]:

Accept an incoming call to talk.

. [Hold Call]:

Put an incoming call on hold.

. [Reject Call]:

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the

following procedures listed below.

1. Select [Hang up].

2. Push on the instrument panel.

3. Push < > on the steering wheel.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the

screen if necessary.

. [Hang up]:

Finish the call.

. [Use Handset]:

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

. [Mute]:

Mute your voice to the person.

. [Keypad]:

Using the touch tone, send digits to the

connected party for using services such as

voicemail.

. [Cancel Mute]:

This will appear after [Mute] is selected.

Mute will be canceled.

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, push

and select [PHONE].

Edit Quick Dial

Quick dial registration and editing/deleting the

registered quick dial can be performed.

Delete Quick Dial

The quick dial entries can be deleted all at the

same time or one by one.

Download Phonebook

Download the contacts registered in a Blue-

tooth cellular phone. Availability of this function

depends on each cellular phone. The memory

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System 4-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(158,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4-8 Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

downloading procedure from the cellular phone

also varies according to each cellular phone.

See cellular phone Owners Manual for details.

Volume & Ringtone

The following kinds of phone volume can be set.

Pushing and selecting [Volume &

Ringtone] can also operate the same settings.

. [Ringtone]/[Incoming Call]/[Outgoing

Call]:

To increase or decrease the volume, select

[Ringtone], [Incoming Call] or [Outgoing

Call] and adjust it with the center dial.

. [Automatic Hold]:

When this function is activated, an incoming

phone call is automatically held.

. [Vehicle Ringtone]:

When this function is activated, a specific

ringtone that is different from the cellular

phone will sound when receiving a call.

Auto Downloaded

When this item is activated and supported by a

compatible phone, the phonebook of the hands-

free phone is automatically downloaded at the

same time that the hands-free phone is con-

nected.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(159,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5 Heater and air conditioner

Operation precautions.............................................................. 5-2

How to view screen ............................................................ 5-2

Automatic operation .................................................................. 5-3

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) ............. 5-3

Heating (A/C OFF) ............................................................. 5-3

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging............................ 5-4

Manual operation ....................................................................... 5-5

Fan speed control................................................................ 5-5

Air recirculation..................................................................... 5-5

Outside air circulation ...................................................... 5-5

Automatic air intake control ............................................ 5-5

Air flow control ................................................................... 5-5

To turn the system OFF........................................................... 5-6

Ventilators.................................................................................... 5-6

Operating tips ............................................................................ 5-6

In-cabin microfilter .................................................................... 5-7

Servicing air conditioner.......................................................... 5-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(160,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5-2 Heater and air conditioner

WARNING

. The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

. Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. On

hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

. Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the heater and air

conditioner system.

You can individually set the driver and front

passenger side temperature using each tem-

perature control switch.

INFO:

. Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

. When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recircula-

tion to allow fresh air into the passenger

compartment. This should help reduce

odors inside the vehicle.

HOW TO VIEW SCREEN

Push to display the heater and air

conditioner status screen.

&1 Displays the temperature setting for the driver

side.

&2 Displays the ventilator mode.

&3 Displays the active mode status.

&4 Displays the fan speed setting.

&5 Displays the temperature setting for the passen-

ger side.

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(161,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

COOLING AND/OR DEHUMIDIFIED HEATING (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the inside

temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed

after the preferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push AUTO>. (The indicator on

the button will illuminate and AUTO will be

displayed.)

2. Operate the driver side temperature control

dial to set the desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature to about 758F

(248C) for normal operation.

. The temperature of the passenger com-

partment will be maintained automati-

cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed

will also be controlled automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and front

passenger side temperature using each

temperature control dial. When

DUAL> the passenger side temperature

control dial is operated, the DUAL indicator

will come on. To turn off the passenger side

temperature control, push DUAL>.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

HEATING (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

Heater and air conditioner 5-3

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(162,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5-4 Heater and air conditioner

1. Push
. The A/C indicator will turn off.

2. Operate the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

. The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

. Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the

system may not work properly.

. Not recommended if windows fog up.

DEHUMIDIFIED DEFROSTING or DEFOGGING

1. Push the front defroster button < >. The

indicator light on the button will come on.

2. Operate the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the fan speed control dial

< > and set it to the maximum position.

. As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push AUTO> to return to

the auto mode.

. When the front defroster button < > is

pushed, the air conditioner will automatically

be turned on at outside temperatures above

238F (58C) to defog the windshield, and

the air recirculate mode will automatically be

turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging

performance.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(163,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

FAN SPEED CONTROL

Turn the fan speed control dial < > to

manually control the fan speed.

Push AUTO> to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

AIR RECIRCULATION

Push < > to recirculate interior air inside the

vehicle. The indicator light will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode .

OUTSIDE AIR CIRCULATION

Push < > to change the air circulation from

the interior air to the outside air. The indicator

light will come on.

AUTOMATIC AIR INTAKE CONTROL

The intake air can be controlled automatically. To

set the automatic control mode, push

< >/< > for about 2 seconds. The

indicator lights will flash twice, and then the

intake air will be controlled automatically.

AIR FLOW CONTROL

Pushing selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventilators.

: Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

Heater and air conditioner 5-5

MANUAL OPERATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(164,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5-6 Heater and air conditioner

Push OFF>.

The direction of the air flow can be adjusted by

*A opening, *B closing or *C adjusting. The sensors *A and *B on the instrument

panel help maintain a constant temperature. Do

not put anything on or around these sensors.

TO TURN THE SYSTEM OFF VENTILATORS OPERATING TIPS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(165,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

The air conditioning system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a

NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow is

extremely decreased or when windows fog

up easily when operating heater or air

conditioning system.

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earths ozone layer. However,

special charging equipment and lubricant are

required when servicing your NISSAN air con-

ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-

cants will cause severe damage to your air

conditioning system. Refer to the vehicle Own-

ers Manual.

Your NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer will be able to service your environmen-

tally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under

high pressure. To avoid personal injury,

any air conditioner service should be

done only by an experienced technician

with the proper equipment.

Heater and air conditioner 5-7

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(166,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5-8 Heater and air conditioner

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(167,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6 Viewing technical information

Status screen.............................................................................. 6-2

Information screen ..................................................................... 6-2

Basic operation .................................................................... 6-2

Viewing information about current vehicle location .......... 6-3

Basic operation .................................................................... 6-3

Vehicle information screen ...................................................... 6-4

Fuel economy information.................................................. 6-4

Tire pressure information ................................................... 6-4

Maintenance information .................................................... 6-6

Viewing available traffic information ...................................... 6-7

Basic operation .................................................................... 6-8

Info on route.......................................................................... 6-8

Nearby traffic info. ............................................................... 6-9

Display urgent traffic information ................................... 6-9

Traffic information on map ............................................ 6-10

Traffic information settings ........................................... 6-11

Viewing available weather information.............................. 6-12

Displaying weather information screen ..................... 6-13

Destination weather on suggested route screen ... 6-19

Automatically display warnings/watches .................. 6-20

Map update ............................................................................. 6-21

Viewing navigation system version information .............. 6-22

Basic operation ............................................................... 6-22

Viewing GPS current location information ...................... 6-22

Basic operation ............................................................... 6-22

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(168,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-2 Viewing technical information

By pushing at any time, a split

screen with audio information that is always at

the top can be displayed.

Each time is pushed, the bottom

part of the screen changes between air condi-

tioner, fuel economy and navigation directions.

INFO:

There are different status screens displayed

depending on various factors, such as the

currently active mode, whether a destination

has been set or not, etc.

When a route to the destination is set and the

audio system is on, a screen similar to the one

above appears.

*1 Turning direction at the next intersection

*2 Name of the next street

*3 Distance to the next intersection

*4 Distance remaining to the destination

*5 Remaining time to the destination

When a route to the destination is not set and

the audio system is off, a screen similar to the

one above appears.

This screen sets or displays various information

that is helpful for using the vehicle safely and

comfortably.

Available items include the vehicle information,

Traffic Info. setup, current location information,

GPS information, Voice recognition list and map

version.

INFO:

An NavTraffic subscription is necessary to view

Traffic Info.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

STATUS SCREEN INFORMATION SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(169,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Available items

. [Fuel Economy]:

Displays the fuel economy information.

Fuel economy information (page 6-4)

. [Tire Pressure]:

Displays the tire pressure information.

Tire pressure information (page 6-4)

. [Maintenance]:

Displays the vehicle maintenance informa-

tion.

Maintenance information (page 6-6)

. [Where am I?]:

Displays information regarding the current

vehicle location.

Viewing information about current

vehicle location (page 6-3)

. [Traffic Info]:

Allows Traffic Info. setup.

Viewing available traffic information

(page 6-7)

. [Weather Info]:

Displays weather information.

Viewing available weather informa-

tion (page 6-12)

. [Others]:

[Map Update]:

Display the map version and enable updating of the map data.

Map update (page 6-21)

[Navigation Version]:

Displays the current navigation system version.

Viewing navigation system version information (page 6-22)

[GPS Position]:

Displays GPS information regarding the current vehicle location.

Viewing GPS current location in- formation (page 6-22)

[Voice Recognition]:

Displays the voice recognition list. 8. Voice recognition

This displays the information about the vehicle

location on the route when driving according to

route guidance.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Where am I?] and push

.

3. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Contents of vehicle location infor- mation

*1 Next Street:

Displays the next street on the route.

*2 Current Street:

Displays the current street on the route.

*3 Previous Street:

Displays the previous street on the route.

Viewing technical information 6-3

VIEWING INFORMATION ABOUT CURRENT VEHICLE LOCATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(170,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-4 Viewing technical information

*4 Displays the distance to the next intersection on

the route.

*5 Displays the distance traveled from the previous

intersection on the route.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the information about the vehicle

location:

Information Where am I? (Standard Mode)

Where am I? (Alternate Command Mode)

FUEL ECONOMY INFORMATION

The distance to empty, average fuel economy

and current fuel economy (shown on the right

side bar) will be displayed for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, highlight

[Reset Fuel Eco] and push .

If [Fuel Eco History] is highlighted and

is pushed, the average fuel con-

sumption history will be displayed in graph form

along with the average for the previous Reset-

to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between US and

Metric.

Unit settings (page 7-9)

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the fuel economy information:

Information Fuel Economy (Standard Mode)

Fuel Economy (Alternate Command Mode)

TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION

The tire pressure will be displayed for reference.

The pressure indication ** psi on the screen

means that the tire pressure is being measured.

After a few driving trips, the pressure for each

tire will be displayed.

In case of low tire pressure, Tire PRESSURE

Low information will be displayed on the screen.

VEHICLE INFORMATION SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(171,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Check the pressure for all tires.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicles traveling condition

and the temperature.

To change the measurement units, highlight

[Select Units] and press .

Unit settings (Tire Pressure) (page 7-10)

WARNING

. When a wheel is replaced, tire

pressure will not be indicated, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer or GT-R

certified NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

Tire pressure

When the system detects low tire pressure, the

following message is displayed.

. Tire Pressure Low

The low-pressure tire is displayed in orange, and

a warning message appears.

. Flat tire

If the system detects a puncture, the punctured

tire is displayed in red, and a warning message

appears.

. TPMS malfunction

When a TPMS is not functioning, the system

displays the tire pressure value as **.

INFO:

The tire pressure will be displayed for reference.

In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRESSURE

information will be displayed on the screen.

Check the pressure of all tires.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the tire pressure information:

Tire Pressure (Alternate Command Mode)

Viewing technical information 6-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(172,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-6 Viewing technical information

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

The maintenance intervals can be displayed for

your desired maintenance items.

To set the maintenance interval for the engine oil,

oil filter, tire and other reminders, choose an item

and push .

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set the

engine oil maintenance information. Use the

same steps to set the other maintenance

information.

1. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance

schedule. To determine the recommended

maintenance interval, refer to your NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide.

3. To display the reminder automatically when

the set trip distance is reached, highlight

[Reminder] and push .

4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE

INFO., push .

Maintenance information display cannot be

operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place to see the information.

The unit can be converted between US and

Metric.

Unit settings (page 7-9)

The Reminder will be automatically displayed as

shown when both of the following conditions are

met:

. the vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK

position.

. the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or

ON position the next time you drive the

vehicle after the set value has been reached.

To return to the previous display after the

maintenance reminder screen is displayed, push

The maintenance reminder screen is displayed

each time the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position unless one of the following opera-

tions is performed:

. Reset Distance is selected.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(173,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. Reminder is set to OFF.

. the maintenance interval is set again.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the maintenance information:

Information Maintenance (Standard Mode)

Maintenance (Alternate Command Mode)

NavTraffic information is a subscription service

offered by SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

This service provides real-time information

regarding traffic flow, accidents, road construc-

tion and other incidents, where available.

NavTraffic combines information from commer-

cial and public traffic data providers including

government departments of transportation, po-

lice, emergency services, road sensors, cameras

and aircraft reports. The traffic information is

broadcast to the vehicle by the SiriusXM

satellites. Available traffic information on the

route the driver selected is shown on the

navigation screen so traffic conditions between

you and the destination are known. Three types

of real-time traffic information for major road-

ways are shown on the navigation system:

* Unscheduled traffic data for example, acci-

dents and disabled vehicles.

* Scheduled traffic data, for example road

construction and road closures.

* Traffic flow information (rate of speed data).

WARNING

NavTraffic information is not a substi-

tute for attentive driving. Traffic condi-

tions change constantly and emergency

situations can arise without warning.

Relying only on NavTraffic information

may lead to a collision and could result

in serious personal injury.

NOTE:

Flow information is provided only for

roads equipped with traffic sensors and

is not available in all markets covered by

the service. Flow data may not be available

on portions of a road that is under

construction.

NavTraffic information is available in limited

markets. To subscribe or to check if this service

is available in the area:

call 1-866-635-2349 or see www.siriusxm.

com/navtraffic

Viewing technical information 6-7

VIEWING AVAILABLE TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(174,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-8 Viewing technical information

INFO:

If a contract is not completed for NavTraffic

information service, a message appears, and it

will not be possible to check the information on

the traffic information system.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Traffic Info] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred information and push

.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen.

Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Available items

. [Info on Route]:

Displays the list of traffic information found

on the recommended route from the current

vehicle location to the destination.

. [Nearby Traffic Info]:

Displays the list of traffic information around

the current vehicle location.

INFO ON ROUTE

This is only available when a route is set.

The list of traffic information found on the

recommended route from the current vehicle

location to the destination is displayed. The

detailed information about displayed events can

also be checked.

1. Highlight [Info on Route] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

2. Highlight the event to check the detailed

information, and push .

3. The map screen centered around the

selected event is displayed. On the left

screen, the detailed information about the

event is displayed.

The message can be scrolled using the

steering wheel.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(175,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

NEARBY TRAFFIC INFO.

The list of available traffic information around the

current vehicle location is displayed.

1. Highlight [Nearby Traffic Info] and push

. A list screen is displayed.

2. Highlight the event to check the detailed

information for and push .

3. The map screen centered around the

selected event is displayed. On the left

screen, the detailed information about the

event is displayed. The message can be

scrolled using the steering wheel.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen.

DISPLAY URGENT TRAFFIC INFOR- MATION

When an urgent event is found around the

current vehicle location, a message pops up

automatically with a voice announcement.

The message includes the icon, event type,

event information and the direct distance from

the current location to the event.

INFO:

. Urgent traffic information is displayed re-

gardless of whether the traffic information

system is on or off.

. When there are multiple urgent events, the

event with the shortest direct distance from

the current location is displayed.

. If the urgent event is on the recommended

route, and if a detour is found, the detour

route notification screen is displayed when

the vehicle approaches the detour point.

Viewing technical information 6-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(176,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-10 Viewing technical information

TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON MAP

With subscription to NavTraffic service, traffic

information is displayed on both Plan View and

BirdviewTM map screen.

See Notes on Traffic Information for further

information.

Notes on NavTraffic information

(page 11-11)

Screen information

*1 Road conditions

Free Flow: (Green)

Moderate traffic: (Yellow)

Heavy traffic: (Red)

Section affected by serious traffic event:

(Purple)

*2 Estimated travel time to destination calculated

with consideration of traffic information on route.

*3 Traffic information icon:

If the route is not already set, all of the traffic

information icons on the map screen are dis-

played in color. When the route is already set, the

icons on the route are displayed in color, and the

icons outside the route are displayed in gray.

: Accident

: Closed road

: Information

: Road work

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(177,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

: Slippery road

: Weather

: Incident

*4 Traffic indicator:

Displays the reception condition of traffic infor-

mation transmitted from the provider.

Green: Reception condition is good.

Gray: Reception condition is not good.

No mark: Subscription to NavTraffic service is not

detected.

Traffic information display and scale levels

2D map and Birdview Map

5 miles 10 km

2 miles 4 km

1 mile 2 km

1/2 mile 1 km

1/4 mile 500 m

1/8 mile 200 m

1/16 mile 100 m

1/32 mile 50 m

1/64 mile 25 m

Checking detailed information for traffic information icons on map

1. Place the cross pointer over the traffic

information icon. The general description of

the icon is displayed.

2. Push or touch [Detail]. The

screen for showing the detailed information

for the traffic information icon is displayed.

3. The map screen centered around the

selected event is displayed. On the left

screen, the detailed information about the

event is displayed. You can scroll the

message by using the steering wheel.

4. Push to return to the current

location map screen.

TRAFFIC INFORMATION SETTINGS

This displays or changes the settings for the

traffic information related functions.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Traffic Info Settings] and push

.

Viewing technical information 6-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(178,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-12 Viewing technical information

4. Highlight the preferred setting and push

. The indicator for the selected

setting illuminates.

Available setting items

. Use Traffic Info.:

Enables all traffic information related func-

tions.

. Show Incidents on Map:

Displays the traffic incidents (e.g., accident)

on the map screen.

. Show Traffic Flow on Map:

Displays the traffic flow with an arrow on the

map screen.

. Blink Red Traffic Flow:

Blinks the red traffic flow lines that represent

congestions.

. Traffic Announcements:

Announces the traffic information event on

the route.

INFO:

. Even when Show Traffic Flow on Map and

Show Incidents on Map are set to off, the

list display of Info on Route and Nearby

Traffic Info will not be affected.

. Even when Traffic Announcement is set to

off, the route guidance will not be affected.

Also, the announcement of emergency

information and weather information will not

be turned off.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To turn on or off the traffic information system:

Information Traffic Information (Standard

Mode)

Traffic Information (Alternate Command Mode)

NavWeatherXM information is a subscription

service offered by SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

This service provides real-time information

regarding current weather, temperature, warn-

ings, road conditions and forecasts where

available. The weather information is broadcast

to the vehicle by the SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

The service enables you to view the following

information on the navigation system.

. Current weather information icon of the

destination on the screen of suggested

route

. Detailed weather information and forecasts

of an area of interest

. Countrywide and local maps with the

current weather, temperature, warnings and

road condition information

. List of warning/watches events detected

around the current location

. Pop-up messages on the navigation screen

with voice announcements when warnings

and watches are detected around the

current location

VIEWING AVAILABLE WEATHER INFORMATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(179,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

WARNING

NavWeatherXM information is not a

substitute for attentive driving. Weather

conditions change constantly and

emergency situations can arise without

warning. Relying only on Nav-

WeatherXM information could result in

serious personal injury.

NavWeatherXM information is available in lim-

ited markets. To subscribe to or check if this

service is available in the area, call 1-866-635-

2349 or access www.siriusxm.com/navweather.

INFO:

. If a contract is not completed for the

NavWeatherXM information service, a mes-

sage appears and it will not be possible to

check the information on the traffic informa-

tion system.

. The weather information is available only for

areas that provide weather information to

NavWeatherXM.

INFO:

The reception condition of the NavWeatherXM

information transmitted from the provider can be

confirmed using the Weather indicator on the

upper right side of the screen.

Green: The reception condition is good.

Gray: The reception condition is not good.

No mark: A subscription to the NavWeatherXM

service is not detected.

DISPLAYING WEATHER INFORMA- TION SCREEN

Basic Operation

1. Push .

2. Highl ight [Weather Info] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred information and push

.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available items

. Current Weather and Forecasts:

Displays current weather information and

three-day forecasts.

. Warnings and Watches History:

Displays a list of warnings and watches

recently detected around the current loca-

Viewing technical information 6-13

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(180,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-14 Viewing technical information

tion.

. Weather Map:

Displays the current weather map for the

preferred area.

. Temperature Map:

Displays the current temperature map for the

preferred area.

. Warnings Map:

Displays the current watches/warnings map

for the preferred area.

. Road Condition Map:

Displays the current road condition map for

the preferred area.

Selecting city

When displaying various weather information

screens by pushing , the range can be

specified for the weather information from

among the current location (local), destination,

countrywide (nation) or a specified city.

The city can be specified by selecting one from

the list that is displayed.

1. Push .

2. Highl ight [Weather Info] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred information and push

.

4. Highlight [Select Other City from Menu] and

push .

5. Highlight the preferred state from the list

and push .

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(181,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6. Highlight the preferred city from the list and

push .

INFO:

[Select Other City from Menu] is not available

while driving.

Current weather and forecasts

The current weather information and a three-day

forecast for the current location, the destination

or the preferred city.

1. Highlight [Current Weather and Forecasts]

and push .

2. Highlight the preferred area and push

.

INFO:

. [Weather Info on Destination] is not

available unless a destination is set for

the route guidance.

. When a destination is not set, nearby

weather information is displayed.

3. A weather information screen is displayed.

Highlight [Forecast] and push .

4. The forecast screen is displayed. A three-

day forecast can be confirmed for the

preferred area.

5. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the list for weather information:

Weather Information (Alternate Command

Mode)

Viewing technical information 6-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(182,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-16 Viewing technical information

Warnings and watches history

A list can be displayed for the warning/watch

events detected around the current location. The

detailed information of each event can also be

displayed.

1. Highlight [Warnings and Watches History]

and push . A list warning/watch

events around the current location is dis-

played.

2. Highlight the event to check the detailed

information and push .

3. A screen with detailed information of the

event is displayed.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Weather Map

The current weather map can be confirmed for

the current location, the destination, the entire

country or the preferred city.

1. Highlight [Weather Map] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred map area push

.

INFO:

[Destination Map] is not available unless a

destination is set for the route guidance.

3. A weather map is displayed. The weather

and precipitation level are shown by colors.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(183,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

INFO:

Touch [Legend] to display the map legend.

Setting by voice command

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

To display the list for weather map:

Weather Map (Alternate Command Mode)

Temperature Map

The current temperature map can be confirmed

for the current location, the destination, the

entire country or the preferred city.

1. Highlight [Temperature Map] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred map area and push

.

INFO:

. [Destination Map] is not available unless

a destination is set for the route gui-

dance.

. When a destination is not set, a nearby

weather map is displayed.

3. A temperature map is displayed. The tem-

perature information is shown by numbers

and colors.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Viewing technical information 6-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(184,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-18 Viewing technical information

INFO:

Touch [Legend] to display the map legend.

Warnings Map

The current warning/watch information can be

confirmed for the current location, the destina-

tion, the entire country or the preferred city.

1. Highlight [Warnings Map] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred map area and push

.

INFO:

[Destination Map] is not available unless a

destination is set for the route guidance.

3. A warning/watch map is displayed. Warning

and watch information is shown by colors.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

INFO:

Touch [Legend] to display the map legend.

Road Condition Map

The current road condition can be confirmed for

the current location, the destination, the entire

country or the preferred city.

1. Highlight [Road Condition Map] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(185,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Highlight the preferred map area and push

.

INFO:

[Destination Map] is not available unless a

destination is set for the route guidance.

3. A road condition map is displayed. The road

conditions are shown by colors.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

INFO:

Touch [Legend] to display the map legend.

DESTINATION WEATHER ON SUG- GESTED ROUTE SCREEN

On the screen of the suggested route after

setting a destination, the current weather

information around the destination is displayed

via icons.

Weather information icons

Clear Mostly Clear

Partly Cloudy

Mostly Cloudy

Cloudy

Haze

Fog

Rain, Light Rain

Hail Heavy Rain

Freezing Rain/Ice

Snow Heavy Snow

Dust/Sand Smoke/Ash

Viewing technical information 6-19

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(186,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-20 Viewing technical information

Thunderstorm

Tornado/Funnel Cloud

AUTOMATICALLY DISPLAY WARN- INGS/WATCHES

When an urgent warning/watch is detected

around the current vehicle location, a message

pops up automatically with a voice announce-

ment.

The message includes the weather icon and text

describing the event.

INFO:

. The pop-up messages and announcements

can be set to on or off.

Weather information settings

(page 6-20)

. If multiple warning/watch events are de-

tected, they will be displayed in order

starting with the one having the shortest

linear distance from the vehicle.

Weather information settings

The settings can be confirmed and changed for

the urgent weather information related functions.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation] and push .

3. Highlight [Weather Info Setting] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred setting and push

. The indicator for the setting

illuminates.

Available setting items

. Display an Alert for Weather Warnings:

Displays a message screen automatically

when the system detects urgent warning

information.

. Display an Alert for Weather Watches:

Displays a message screen automatically

when the system detects urgent watch

information.

. Voice Announcements:

Provides urgent information announcements

for warnings and watches around the

current location.

Types of warnings/watches

Category Warnings/Watches

Tornado Tornado Watch, Tornado

Hurricane Inland Hurricane Wind, Hurricane Force Wind, Hurricane, Typhoon

Storm Severe Thunderstorm Watch, Se- vere Thunderstorm, Storm, Tropical Storm, Inland Tropical Storm, Dust Storm

Flood Flood Watch, Flash Flood, Coastal Flood, Lakeshore Flood, High Surf, Flood

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(187,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Category Warnings/Watches

Winter Winter Watch, Heavy Snow, Heavy Sleet, Lake Effect Snow, Freeze, Heavy Freezing Spray, Blizzard, Ice Storm, Winter Storm

Wind Wind Watch, High Wind, Wind Chill, Gale

Extremes Excessive Heat

Other Red Flag, Tsunami, Avalanche, Special Marine, Earthquake, Law Enforcement, Hazardous Materials, Nuclear Power Plant, Radiological Hazard, Civil Danger, Fire, Shelter in Place, Volcano, Other Watches, Other Warnings

INFO:

. The Other Watches category in the

Other category includes Inland Hurricane

Watch, Hurricane Watch, Typhoon Watch,

Tropical Storm Watch, Inland Tropical Storm

Watch and Fire Weather Watch.

. The Other Warnings category in the

Other category includes Dense Fog Warn-

ing, Freezing Fog Warning, Extreme Cold

Warning, Frost Warning, Hydrologic Warn-

ing, Ashfall Warning, Air Stagnation Warn-

ing, Low Water Warning, Ice Accretion

Warning, Dense Smoke Warning, Dense

Smoke Advisory, Freezing Fog Advisory,

Dense Fog Advisory, Ashfall Advisory and

Air Stagnation Advisory. Map data can be updated.

1. Push .

2. Highl ight [Map Update] and push

.

3. Insert the DVD containing the new map

data.

4. Highl ight [DVD Update] and push

.

5. For the procedure of the map update, refer

to the manual of the updated DVD-ROMs.

Viewing technical information 6-21

MAP UPDATE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(188,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-22 Viewing technical information

INFO:

. Do not eject the DVD while updating the

map data. Doing so will result in an

incomplete update.

. To order updated DVD-ROMs, contact your

NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer.

NOTICE

In handling the DVD-ROM, be careful

on the following points.

. Do not try to bend the DVD-ROM.

Do not use any disk that is bent or

cracked.

. Do not use any benzine, thinner, or

antistatic spray on them.

. Do not put on any sticker or write

anything on either surface.

. If you need to clean it, do so with a

soft cloth by wiping from the centre

outward.

. Do not use a DVD Laser Lens

Cleaners as they may cause the

DVD player to malfunction.

This displays the map version information.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Navigation Version] and push

.

3. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

This displays GPS information, such as the

positioning status, latitude/longitude, altitude

and satellite locations.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [GPS Position] and push

.

4. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Contents of GPS information

*1 GPS Reception:

Displays the GPS positioning method.

3-dimension Calculating the latitude, longitude and altitude by four or more satel- lites.

2-dimension Calculating the latitude, longitude and altitude by three or more satellites.

Out of range Cannot calculate because no GPS satellites can be located.

*2 Latitude:

Displays the latitude.

*3 Longitude:

Displays the longitude.

*4 Approx Altitude:

Displays the approximate altitude.

VIEWING NAVIGATION SYSTEM VERSION INFORMATION

VIEWING GPS CURRENT LOCATION INFORMATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(189,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

*5 Positioning status:

(green) Satellites are available.

(gray) Satellites are being searched for.

Viewing technical information 6-23

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(190,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

6-24 Viewing technical information

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(191,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7 Other settings

Settings screen .......................................................................... 7-2

Basic operation .................................................................... 7-2

Audio settings............................................................................. 7-3

Display settings .......................................................................... 7-4

Basic operation .................................................................... 7-4

Display adjustment .............................................................. 7-4

Setting color theme............................................................. 7-5

Volume adjustment .................................................................... 7-6

Basic operation .................................................................... 7-6

Clock settings ............................................................................ 7-7

Basic operation .................................................................. 7-7

Comfort settings........................................................................ 7-8

Language and unit settings .................................................... 7-8

Language settings ............................................................. 7-8

Unit settings ........................................................................ 7-9

Unit settings (Tire Pressure) ........................................ 7-10

Image viewer ........................................................................... 7-10

Full screen display.......................................................... 7-11

Setting the image viewer .............................................. 7-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(192,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7-2 Other settings

The navigation system can be customized to

make it easier for you to use.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push .

Available setting items

. [Navigation]:

Adjust various settings of the navigation

system.

Navigation setting (page 2-91)

. [Audio]:

Adjusts the audio settings.

Audio settings (page 7-3)

. [Phone]:

Adjusts various settings of the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

Phone setting (page 4-7)

. [Bluetooth]:

Set Bluetooth Audio and Phone.

Bluetooth settings (page 3-23)

. [Volume & Beeps]:

Adjusts the volume and sets the beep

function.

Volume adjustment (page 7-6)

. [Display]:

Adjusts the display.

Display settings (page 7-4)

. [Clock]:

Changes the clock settings.

Clock settings (page 7-7)

. [Others]:

[Comfort]:

This item is displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Comfort settings (page 7-8)

[Language & Units]:

Changes the language or measurement units.

Language and unit settings (page 7-8)

[Voice Recognition]:

Adjusts various settings of the voice recognition system.

8. Voice recognition

[Camera]:

Turns ON or OFF the predictive course line display.

Camera settings (page 9-7)

[Image Viewer]:

Displays the image files in the USB device.

Image viewer (page 7-10)

SETTINGS SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(193,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

This allows to you adjust the speaker tone

quality and sound balance.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Audio] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred adjustment item and

push .

4. Use the center dial to adjust the tone quality

or sound balance.

5. After sett ings, push or

to apply the setting.

6. Push to return to the previous

screen.

Push to return to the current

location map screen.

Available items

. [Bass]:

Adjust the tone quality of the bass.

. [Treble]:

Adjust the tone quality of the treble.

. [Balance]:

Adjust the sound level between the left and

right speakers.

. [Fade]:

Adjust the sound level between the front and

rear speakers.

. [Speed Sensitive Vol.]:

The sound volume is increased according to

the vehicle speed.

. [DivX Registration Code]:

The registration code for a device that is

used to download DivX files will be

displayed on the screen. If a disc is loaded

or a USB device is connected to the audio

system, this function will not be activated.

. [Display Album Cover Art]:

When this item is turned to ON, the album

cover image is displayed when playing

compressed music files through a CD,

DVD or USB device. When the image is

not properly embedded in the file or device,

the image will not be displayed.

INFO:

Pushing and turning the AUDIO knob can also

adjust the tone quality and sound balance.

Other settings 7-3

AUDIO SETTINGS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(194,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7-4 Other settings

This menu turns on and off the display, adjust

the image quality of the navigation screen and

change the color of the menu screen.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Display] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred adjustment item and

push .

Available setting items

. [Display Adjustment]

Turn on and off the display and adjust the

image quality of the navigation screen.

. [Color Theme]

Set the color of the menu screen.

DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT

This menu turns on and off the display and

adjusts the image quality of the navigation

screen.

Basic operation

1. Highlight [Display Adjustment] and push

.

2. Highlight the preferred adjustment item and

push .

3. Use the center dial to adjust to the preferred

setting.

4. After setting, push or

to apply the setting.

5. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Display]:

Turn on or off the screen.

Display (page 7-4)

. [Brightness]:

Adjust the screen brightness.

Brightness (page 7-5)

. [Contrast]:

Adjust the screen contrast.

Contrast (page 7-5)

. [Background Color]:

Set the background color.

Background color (page 7-5)

Display

To turn off the display, push .

The display can also be turned off by pushing

and holding < OFF> for more than 2

seconds.

When any button is pushed with the display off,

the display turns on. The display will automati-

cally turn off when there is no switch operation

DISPLAY SETTINGS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(195,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

for 5 seconds.

To turn on the display, push < OFF>.

Brightness

Adjust the display brightness by rotating the

center dial in the direction of [+] or [].

Each time [+] or [] is pushed, the display

brightness changes.

Contrast

Adjust the display contrast by rotating the center

dial in the direction of [+] or [].

Each time [+] or [] is pushed, the display

contrast changes.

Background color

Select to toggle between the day screen and

night screen.

Day screen

Night screen

INFO:

The background color setting can also be

changed using the < OFF>.

SETTING COLOR THEME

1. Highl ight [Color Theme] and push

.

Other settings 7-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(196,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7-6 Other settings

2. Highlight the preferred menu color and push

.

This turns on and off, as well as adjusts, the

phone function (ringer, incoming and outgoing

volume), the voice guide function and the beep

function.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Volume & Beeps] and push

.

3. Highlight the preferred adjustment item and

push .

4. Use the center dial to adjust the volume.

Push to set to on or off.

5. After setting, push or

to apply the setting.

6. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

. [Audio Volume]:

Adjust the volume level of the audio system.

. [Guidance Volume]:

Adjust the volume level of voice guidance.

. [Ringtone]:

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone.

. [Incoming Call]:

Adjust the incoming call volume.

. [Outgoing Call]:

Adjust the outgoing call volume.

. [Switch Beeps]:

Select to toggle the beep function between

on and off. The indicator light illuminates

when the beep function is set to on. The

beep sounds when pushing and holding a

button or when a prohibited operation is

performed.

. [Guidance Voice]:

Select to toggle the voice guidance function

between on and off. The indicator light

illuminates when the voice guidance func-

tion is set to on.

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(197,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

This changes the clock settings.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Clock] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred adjustment item and

push .

4. Use the center dial to adjust to the preferred

setting. Push to set on or off.

5. After setting, push or

to apply the setting.

6. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available setting items

. [On-screen Clock]:

Select to toggle the clock display located in

the top right corner of the display between

on and off. The indicator light illuminates

when the clock display is set to on.

. [Clock Format (24h)]:

Select the clock format between 12-hour

and 24-hour times. The indicator light

illuminates when the clock is set to the 24-

hour format.

. [Offset (hour)]:

Use the center dial to adjust the offset value

(between 12 and +12).

. [Offset (min)]:

Use the center dial to adjust the offset value

(between 59 and +59).

. [Daylight Savings Time]:

Select to toggle the daylight savings time

setting between on and off. The indicator

light illuminates when the daylight savings

time setting is set to on.

. [Time Zone]:

Select an appropriate time zone from the list

that appears when this item is highlighted.

Pacific

Mountain

Central

Eastern

Atlantic

Newfoundland

Hawaii

Alaska

Other settings 7-7

CLOCK SETTINGS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(198,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7-8 Other settings

This key does not appear on the display until the

ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Comfort] and push .

3. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push . The indicator light of the

selected item illuminates.

4. After setting, push or

to apply the setting.

5. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Available items

. Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the interior

lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.

. Speed Sensing Wiper Interval:

When this item is turned to ON, the wiper

interval is adjusted automatically according

to the vehicle speed.

. Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only the

drivers door is unlocked first after the door

unlock operation. When the door handle

request switch on the drivers or front

passengers side door is pushed to be

unlocked, only the corresponding door is

unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked

if the door unlock operation is performed

again within 60 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all the

doors will be unlocked after the door unlock

operation is performed once.

. Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, door lock/

unlock function by pushing the door handle

request switch will be activated.

. Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item, push and

choose [YES] if you want to return all

settings to the default.

This changes the language and measurement

unit used in the system.

LANGUAGE SETTINGS

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Language & Units] and push

.

4. Highlight [Select Language] and push

.

COMFORT SETTINGS LANGUAGE AND UNIT SETTINGS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(199,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5. Highlight the preferred setting item and

push . The indicator light of the

selected item illuminates.

Available languages

. [English]

. [Francais]

. [Espanol]

NOTICE

Do not change the ignition switch

position while changing the language.

Doing so may cause a system malfunc-

tion.

UNIT SETTINGS

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Language & Units] and push

.

4. Highl ight [Select Units] and push

.

5. Highlight the preferred unit and push

. The indicator of the selected

unit illuminates.

Available units

. US:

mile, MPH, 8F, MPG

. Metric:

km, km/h, 8C, L/100 km

6. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

Other settings 7-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(200,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7-10 Other settings

UNIT SETTINGS (Tire Pressure)

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Language/Units] and push

.

4. Highlight [Select Units (Tire Pressure)] and

push .

5. Highlight the preferred unit and push

. The indicator of the selected

unit illuminates.

Available units

. psi

. kPa

6. Push to return to the previous

screen.

The image files in the USB device will be

displayed.

1. Press .

2. Select [Others] and press .

3. Se lect [ Image Viewer ] and press

.

The image of the selected file is displayed on the

right side of the screen.

When a number of folders are included in the

USB device, select a folder from the list and

push to display the file list.

IMAGE VIEWER

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(201,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

FULL SCREEN DISPLAY

The full screen display will appear when select-

ing [Full Screen Display] and press .

To operate the Image Viewer or to change the

settings, select the desired key.

. (Start)

Select and push to start

playing the slideshow.

. (Stop)

Select and push to stop

the slideshow.

. (Next)

Select and push to

display the next file.

. (Previous)

Select and push to

display the previous file.

SETTING THE IMAGE VIEWER

The Image Viewer setting display will appear

when selecting [Settings] on the full screen

display and pushing . The following

settings are available for the full screen display.

. Slideshow Speed

Choose [Slideshow Speed] and push

. From the following display,

select the changing time from 5, 10, 30,

60 seconds or No Auto Change.

. Slideshow Order

Choose [Slideshow Order] and push

. From the following display,

select Random or Order List.

Operating tips

. Only files that meet the following conditions

will be displayed.

File format: JPEG (.jpg or .jpeg)

File size: 2 MB or less

Display size: 1,536 6 2,048 pixels or

less

. If an electronic device (such as a digital

camera) is directly connected to the vehicle

using a USB cable, no image will be

displayed on the screen.

. If the file name is too long, some file names

may not be entirely displayed.

Other settings 7-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(202,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7-12 Other settings

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(203,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8 Voice recognition

NISSAN Voice Recognition .................................................... 8-2

Standard mode........................................................................... 8-2

Confirming how to use voice commands ...................... 8-2

Using Voice Recognition System .................................... 8-4

Before starting ...................................................................... 8-4

Giving voice commands..................................................... 8-4

Voice command examples ................................................. 8-9

Alternate Command Mode ................................................... 8-13

Displaying how to operate Voice Recognition System ......................................................... 8-13

Confirming how to use voice commands................. 8-14

Using Voice Recognition System ............................... 8-17

Before starting................................................................. 8-17

Giving voice commands................................................ 8-17

System feedback announcement modes ................. 8-22

Setting alternate command mode .............................. 8-22

Speaker adaptation ........................................................ 8-22

Voice command examples............................................ 8-24

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(204,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-2 Voice recognition

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free

operation of the navigation system and other

systems equipped on this vehicle, in one of two

modes, Standard Mode or Alternate Command

Mode. Standard Mode allows the operation of

Navigation, Phone, Audio, Information and Help.

The commands that are available are always

shown on the display and announced by the

system. To perform operations, simply follow the

prompts given by the system. In Standard Mode,

hands-free operation of Change map view,

Route selection and Bluetooth Audio, etc. is

not available through Voice Recognition.

Alternate Command Mode allows advanced

operations. When this mode is active, an

expanded list of commands can be spoken after

pushing < >, and the voice command menu

prompts are turned off. Note that in this mode

the recognition success rate may be affected

because the number of available commands and

ways of speaking each command are increased.

Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate

Command Mode be turned OFF and Standard

Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-

mance.

Alternate Command Mode (page 8-13)

INFO:

. To improve recognition success when Alter-

nate Command Mode is active, try using the

Speaker Adaptation function available in that

mode.

Speaker adaptation (page 8-22)

Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate

Command Mode be turned OFF and Stan-

dard Mode be used for the best recognition

performance.

. For the voice commands for the audio,

phone and other systems, refer to the

vehicle Owners Manual. The following sec-

tions refer only to the navigation, phone and

information systems.

. If the air conditioner is set to Auto, the fan

speed is automatically lowered so that

commands can be recognized more easily.

CONFIRMING HOW TO USE VOICE COMMANDS

When operating the voice recognition system

for the first time or if help is preferred to use the

system, the User Guide can be displayed.

It is possible to confirm how to use voice

commands by accessing a simplified User

Guide, which contains basic instructions and

tutorials for several voice commands.

Basic operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. H igh l ight [User Guide] and push

.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(205,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available items

. [Getting Started]:

Describes the basics of how to operate the

voice recognition system.

. [Lets Practice]:

Mode for practice following the system

voice.

. [Using the Address Book]:

Tutorial for entering a destination by the

Address Book.

. [Finding a Street Address]:

Tutorial for entering a destination by street

address.

. [Placing Calls]:

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice

command operation. Refer to the vehicle

Owners Manual for details.

. [Help on Speaking]:

Displays useful tips regarding speaking for

correct command recognition by the system.

INFO:

The Command List feature is only available when

Alternate Command Mode is active.

Getting Started

Before using the voice recognition system for

the first time, it is possible to confirm how to use

commands by viewing the Getting Started

section of the User Guide.

1. Highlight [Getting Started] and push

.

2. To confirm the page, scroll the screen using

the center dial.

Practicing voice commands

Practice for using the voice recognition function

can be performed by repeating a phone number

after the system announces it.

1. Highlight [Lets Practice] and push

.

2. Practice voice commands in accordance

with the audio guidance.

Tutorials on operation of voice re- cognition system

When selecting [Using the Address Book],

[Finding a Street Address] or [Placing Calls],

the system displays tutorials on how to perform

these operations using voice recognition.

Voice recognition 8-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(206,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-4 Voice recognition

Useful tips for correct operation

It is possible to display useful speaking informa-

tion that may help the system to accept a voice

command correctly.

1. Highlight [Help on Speaking] and push

.

2. To confirm the page, scroll the screen using

the center dial.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION SYS- TEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the

system is ready to accept voice commands. If

< > is pushed before the initialization com-

pletes, the display will show the message:

System not ready.

BEFORE STARTING

To get the best recognition performance from

Voice Recognition, observe the following items.

. The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to eliminate

the surrounding noises (traffic noise and

vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent

the system from correctly recognizing the

voice commands.

. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command.

. Speak in a natural conversational voice

without pausing between words.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system provides the voice menu

prompt.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from [ ] to [ ], speak a

command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts

and speak after the tone sounds until the

preferred operation is completed.

Operating tips

. Speak a command after the tone.

. Commands that are available are always

shown on the display and spoken through

voice menu prompts. Commands other than

those that are displayed are not accepted.

Follow the prompts given by the system.

. If the command is not accepted, the system

announces, Please say again. Repeat the

command in a clear voice.

. Push once to return to the

previous screen.

. To cancel the command, push and hold

< >. The message, Voice canceled will

be announced.

Voice Prompt Interrupt:

Push < > to stop the voice prompt and give

the command at once. Remember to wait for the

tone before speaking.

How to speak numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice

commands. Refer to the following examples.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(207,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

General rule:

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if speaking 500, five zero zero can be

used, but five hundred cannot.)

Examples:

1-800-662-6200

One eight zero zero six six two six two zero

zero

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

Recognition of phone numbers can be improved

by speaking the phone number in 3 groups of

numbers. For example, to call 800-662-6200,

speak Eight Zero Zero first, and the system will

then ask to speak the next three digits. Then,

speak Six Six Two. After recognition, the

system will then ask to speak the last 4 digits.

Speak, Six Two Zero Zero. Using this method

of phone digit entry can improve recognition

performance.

INFO:

For best recognition, speak zero for the

number 0 and oh for the letter o.

Voice recognition 8-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(208,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-6 Voice recognition

Command List

Category Command:

Command Action

Call (Optional) Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either phonebook. Please say Call followed by a stored name.

Phone Operates Phone function.

Navigation Operates Navigation function.

Information Displays vehicle Information function.

Audio Operates Audio function.

Help Displays User Guide.

Navigation Command:

Command Action

Home Sets a route to the home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental U.S. and Canada only).

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(209,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Information Command:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on or off.

Where am I? Displays the current location.

Vehicle Phone Command:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the quick dial.

Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Voice recognition 8-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(210,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-8 Voice recognition

Audio Command:

Command Action

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio, selecting the channel last played.

CD Starts to play a CD.

General Commands:

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(211,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLES

To use the voice recognition function, speaking

one command is sometimes sufficient, but at

other times it is necessary to speak two or more

commands. As examples, some additional basic

operations that can be performed by voice

commands are described here.

Example 1: Placing call to phone number 800-662-6200

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. The system announces.

3. Speak Phone.

4. Speak Dial Number.

5. Speak 800.

6. The system announces, Please say next

three digits or dial, or say change number.

Speak 662.

7. The system announces, Please say last four

digits or say change number. Speak

6200.

8. The system announces, Dial or Change

Number?. Speak Dial.

Voice recognition 8-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(212,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-10 Voice recognition

9. The system makes a call to 800-662-6200.

INFO:

. Speaking 800-662-6200 (10 continuous

digits) or 662-6200 (7 continuous digits)

is acceptable, if the area code is not

necessary. However the 3-3-4 digit group-

ing is recommended for improved recogni-

tion.

How to speak numbers (page 8-17)

. The NISSAN voice recognition system is not

limited to recognizing phone numbers of

only 7 or 10 digits. To dial a number in a

format other than the 3-3-4 digit grouping,

use the International Call command.

. If Change Number is spoken during phone

number entry, the system will automatically

request that the number be repeated using

the 3-3-4 format. In this case please speak

the area code first and then follow the

prompts.

. Do not add a 1 in front of the area code

when speaking phone numbers.

. If the system does not recognize a voice

command, please try repeating the com-

mand using a natural voice. Speaking too

slowly or too loudly may further decrease

recognition performance.

Example 2: Placing international call to phone number 011-81-111-222- 333

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. The system announces.

3. Speak Phone.

4. Speak International Call.

5. Speak 01181111222333.

6. Speak Dial.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(213,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-

222-333.

INFO:

Any digit input format is available in the

International Number input process.

Example 3: Setting destination by street address

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. The system announces, Would you like to

access Phone, Navigation, Information,

Audio or Help?.

3. Speak Navigation.

4. Speak Address.

INFO:

Press or touch [Help] to display

the user guide screen.

5. Speak the name of the state, California.

6. Speak the name of the city, Gardena.

7. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the list of city

names is displayed.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes again, speak Four.

Voice recognition 8-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(214,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-12 Voice recognition

9. Speak the name of the street, South

Figueroa street.

INFO:

. Only the official street names stored in

the map database can be recognized by

the system. To improve accuracy, speak

the street name precisely and include

Boulevard, Way, North, South, etc., if

known. If unsure of the full name, speak-

ing only part of the street name such as

Figueroa is acceptable, but recognition

accuracy may be reduced.

. To correct the entered city, street or

house number, speak Change City,

Change Street or Change House

Number.

10. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the list of street

names appears.

11. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes again, speak One.

12. Speak the house number.

How to speak numbers (page 8-4)

INFO:

If the house number is unknown, speak No

house number.

13. To confirm the destination location on the

map, speak Show Map. To calculate a

route, speak Calculate Route.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(215,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

The following section is applicable when Alter-

nate Command Mode is active.

Setting alternate command mode

(page 8-22)

When Alternate Command Mode is active, an

expanded list of commands can be used after

pushing < >. In this mode, available com-

mands are not fully shown on the display or

prompted. Review the expanded command list,

available when this mode is active. See exam-

ples of Alternate Command Mode screens.

Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate

Command Mode be turned OFF and Standard

Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-

mance.

Confirming voice commands

(page 8-13)

DISPLAYING HOW TO OPERATE VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

When operating the voice recognition system

for the first time or if help is preferred to use the

system, the Command List (available only in

Alternate Command Mode) or the User Guide

are available.

Basic operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available items

. [Command List]:

A list of voice commands that the system

can accept is displayed.

. [User Guide]:

A simplified operation manual of the voice

recognition system can be displayed and

how to use the voice commands can be

confirmed.

INFO:

The Command List feature is only available when

Alternate Command Mode is active.

Confirming voice commands

When controlling the system by voice com-

mands for the first time or if an appropriate voice

command is unknown, confirm using the voice

command lists.

The following information describes how to

display the navigation command list and the

help list. For information about the operations of

other functions, refer to the vehicle Owners

Manual.

Voice recognition 8-13

ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(216,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-14 Voice recognition

Example: Displaying the navigation com-

mand list:

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. Highlight [Command List] and push

.

5. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Available items

. Phone Commands

. Navigation Commands

. Information Commands

. Audio Commands

. Help Commands

6. To confirm the list, scroll the screen using

the center dial.

7. Push to return to the previous

screen.

CONFIRMING HOW TO USE VOICE COMMANDS

It is possible to confirm how to use voice

commands by accessing a simplified User

Guide, which contains basic instructions and

tutorials for several voice commands.

Basic operation

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. H igh l ight [User Guide] and push

.

5. Highlight the preferred item and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(217,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Available items

. [Getting Started]:

Describes the basics of how to operate the

voice recognition system.

. [Lets Practice]:

Mode for practice following the system

voice.

. [Using the Address Book]:

Tutorial for setting a destination by the

Address Book.

. [Finding a Street Address]:

Tutorial for entering a destination by street

address.

. [Placing Calls]:

Tutorial for marking a phone call by voice

command operation.

. [Help on Speaking]:

Displays the useful tips of speaking for

correct command recognition by the system.

. [Voice Recognition Settings]:

Describes the available voice recognition

settings.

. [Adapting the System to Your Voice]:

Tutorial adapting the system to the users

voice.

Getting Started

Before using the voice recognition system for

the first time, it is possible to confirm how to use

commands by viewing the Getting Started

section of the User Guide.

1. Highlight [Getting Started] and push

.

2. To confirm the page, scroll the screen using

the center dial.

Practicing voice commands

Practice for using the voice recognition function

can be performed by repeating a phrase after

the system announces it.

1. Highlight [Lets Practice] and push

.

2. Practice voice commands in accordance

with the audio guidance.

Tutorials on operation of voice re- cognition system

When selecting [Using the Address Book],

[Finding a Street Address] or [Placing Calls],

the system displays tutorials on how to perform

these operations using voice recognition.

Example: With [Using the Address Book] high-

lighted

Voice recognition 8-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(218,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-16 Voice recognition

1. Highlight [Using the Address Book] and

push . The tutorial starts.

2. The voice guide demonstrates how to speak

when giving commands.

3. When the tutorial is completed, the system

automatically switches to the Menu screen.

Useful tips for correct operation

It is possible to display useful speaking tips that

may help the system to accept a voice command

correctly.

1. Highlight [Help on Speaking] and push

.

2. To confirm the page, scroll the screen using

the the center dial.

Voice recognition settings

The settings for easy operation of the voice

recognition system are displayed.

1. Highlight [Voice Recognition Settings] and

push .

2. To confirm the page, scroll the screen using

the center dial.

Adapting Voice Recognition System to Your Voice

The voice recognition system is equipped with a

learning function to adapt to the users voice for

better recognition. It is possible to confirm how

to operate the learning function through this

tutorial.

1. Highlight [Adapting the System to Your

Voice] and push . The tutorial

starts.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(219,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. The voice guide demonstrates the steps that

have to be performed.

3. When the tutorial is completed, the system

automatically switches to the Menu screen.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION SYS- TEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the

system is ready to accept voice commands. If

< > is pushed before the initialization com-

pletes, the display will show the message:

System not ready.

BEFORE STARTING

To get the best recognition performance out of

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

. The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to eliminate

the surrounding noises (traffic noise and

vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent

the system from correctly recognizing the

voice commands.

. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command.

. Speak in a natural conversational voice

without pausing between words.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, Please say a

command.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from [ ] to [ ], speak a

command.

Operating tips

. If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, Please say again.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

. Push once to return to the

previous screen.

. To cancel the command, push and hold

< >. The message, Voice canceled will

be announced.

Voice Prompt Interrupt:

Push < > to stop the voice prompt and give

the command at once. Remember to wait for the

tone before speaking.

How to speak numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice

commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. For

example, to speak 500, five zero zero can be

used, but five hundred cannot.

Examples:

1-800-662-6200

One eight zero zero six six two six two zero

zero

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

Recognition of phone numbers can be improved

by speaking the phone number in 3 groups of

numbers. For example, to call 800-662-6200,

speak Eight Zero Zero first, and the system will

Voice recognition 8-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(220,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-18 Voice recognition

then ask to speak the next three digits. Then,

speak Six Six Two. After recognition, the

system will then ask to speak the last 4 digits.

Speak, Six Two Zero Zero. Using this method

of phone digit entry can improve recognition

performance.

INFO:

For best recognition, speak zero for the

number 0 and oh for the letter o.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(221,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Command List

Navigation Command:

Command Action

Home Sets a route to your home location.

Address Sets a route to the street address that you specify (for continental U.S. and Canada only).

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Sets a route to a location stored in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previously entered destination.

Previous Start Point Sets a route to the previous starting point.

Minimize Freeway Route Sets the route search condition to minimize the usage of freeways.

Fastest Route Sets the route search condition to find the fastest time.

Shortest Route Sets the route search condition to find the shortest distance.

Cancel Route Stops the current route but can be resumed by using VOICE>.

Delete Destination Deletes the entire route (destination and waypoints).

Birdview Map Displays the map in BirdviewTM (3D).

Planview Map Displays the map in Plan View (2D).

North Up Locks the map to make North always point up.

Heading Up Locks the vehicle indicator to make it always point up.

Zoom In <1 to 13> Increases the magnification of the map by the number of steps specified.

Zoom Out <1 to 13> Decreases the magnification of the map by the number of steps specified.

Voice Guidance On/Off Turns the navigation guidance on and off.

Guidance Voice Repeat Speaks the current navigation guidance.

Voice recognition 8-19

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(222,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-20 Voice recognition

INFO:

The words in italics are variable.

Information Command:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Tire Pressure Displays tire pressure information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Where am I? Displays the current location.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on or off.

Weather Information Displays weather information.

Weather Map Displays the weather map.

Vehicle Phone Command:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the quick dial.

Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call History Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(223,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Audio Command:

Command Action

CD Starts to play a CD.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.

USB Turns on the USB device.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth audio player.

AUX Turns on the AUX.

General Command:

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Help Command:

Command Action

Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list.

Phone Commands Displays the phone command list.

Audio Commands Displays the audio command list.

Information Commands Displays the information command list.

Help Commands Displays the help command list.

User Guide Displays the User Guide

Speaker Adaptation The system memorizes the voices of up to three persons for better voice recognition performance.

Voice recognition 8-21

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(224,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-22 Voice recognition

SYSTEM FEEDBACK ANNOUNCE- MENT MODES

It is possible to select two modes, long or short,

for the announcement by the system.

How to set

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. Highlight [Minimize Voice Feedback] and

push . The indicator illuminates,

and the system announcement mode

switches to the short mode.

5. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

SETTING ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE

This mode enables the operation of the display

and audio through Voice Recognition. When this

mode is active, an expanded list of commands

can be spoken after pushing < >, and the

voice command menu prompts are turned off.

Note that in this mode the recognition success

rate may be affected because the number of

available commands and ways of speaking each

command are increased.

This mode can be turned on or off.

How to set

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. Highlight [Alternate Command Mode] and

push . A confirmation message is

displayed. Highlight [Yes] and push

. The indicator illuminates, and

Alternate Command Mode switches to ON.

5. Push to return to the previous

screen. Push to return to the

current location map screen.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION

The voice recognition system has a function to

learn the users voice for better voice recognition

performance.

The system can memorize the voices of up to

three persons.

Having system learn users voice

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(225,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

4. Highlight [Speaker Adaptation] and push

.

5. Highlight the user whose voice is memorized

by the system, and push .

6. Highlight [Start Speaker Adaptation Learn-

ing] and push .

7. Highlight the voice command category to be

learned by the system, and push .

The voice command category list is dis-

played.

8. Highlight the voice command to be learned

by the system, and push . The

voice recognition system starts.

9. The system announces, Please say a

command.

10. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from [ ] to [ ], speak a

command.

11. When the system has recognized the voice

command, the voice of the user is learned.

Push once to return to the

previous screen.

Voice recognition 8-23

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(226,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-24 Voice recognition

INFO:

With [Continuous Learning] set to on, the

system does not go back to the command

list screen, allowing to continue voice

command learning by the system.

12. If the system has learned the command

correctly, None will change to Stored.

Editing registered items

It is possible to edit user names and select

learning function settings.

1. Push .

2. Highlight [Others] and push .

3. Highlight [Voice Recognition] and push

.

4. Highlight [Speaker Adaptation] and push

.

5. Highlight a user to edit, and push

.

6. Highlight [Setting] and push .

7. Highlight an item to edit, and push

.

Setting items

. [Edit User Name]:

Edit the user name.

. [Delete Voice Data]:

Reset the user voice that the voice recognition system has learned.

. [Continuous Learning]:

Have the system learn the voice com- mands of the user in succession, without selecting commands one by one.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLES

To use the voice recognition function, speaking

one command is sometimes sufficient, but at

other times it is necessary to speak two or more

commands. As examples, some additional basic

operations by voice commands are described

here.

Example 1: Switching map to 2D (Plan View) mode

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. The system announces, Please say a

command.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(227,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from [ ] to [ ], speak

Plan View Map.

4. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the map is

displayed in 2D (Plan View).

Example 2: Setting destination using places list

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. The system announces, Please say a

command.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from [ ] to [ ], speak

Places.

4. If a route is already set, choose Near

Current Location, Along Route or Near

Destination.

5. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes again, speak Along Route.

6. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the list of places

of interest categories appears.

7. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes again, speak Two.

8. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the list of places

of interest in the category specified in the

previous step appears.

9. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes again, speak One.

10. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the system

starts calculating a route to the selected

facility.

Voice recognition 8-25

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(228,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-26 Voice recognition

Example 3: Setting destination by street address

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. The system announces, Please say a

command.

3. Speak Address.

4. Speak the name of the state, California.

5. Speak the name of the city, Gardena.

6. Speak the name of the street, South

Figueroa street.

INFO:

Speak the street name precisely including

boulevard, way, north, south, etc. In Alter-

nate Command Mode, the system does not

recognize abbreviated names when they are

spoken. In this case, the system does not

accept Figueroa street or Figueroa.

7. Voice feedback will be provided when the

command is accepted, and the list of street

names appears.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes again, speak One.

9. Speak the house number.

How to speak numbers (page 8-17)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(229,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

If the house number is unknown, speak No

house number.

10. To confirm the destination location on the

map, speak Show Map. To calculate a

route, speak Calculate Route.

Voice recognition 8-27

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(230,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

8-28 Voice recognition

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(231,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

9 Monitor system

Rear and Rear-Wide View monitor ..................................... 9-2

How to switch display ........................................................ 9-2

How to read displayed lines (Only RearView Monitor) ............................................................... 9-3

About RearView Monitor .................................................... 9-3

How to park with predictive course lines ........................... 9-5

Operating tips..................................................................... 9-7

Camera settings ........................................................................ 9-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(232,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

9-2 Monitor system

When the shift lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows

the view to the rear of the vehicle.

When touching the View key on the screen,

the view on the screen will change to the

rearview screen. When the View key is pushed

again, the rear-wide view is displayed.

The rear-wide view screen and/or rear view

screen switches to another screen when the

shift lever is moved out of the R (Reverse)

position.

The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary objects

to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The

system will not detect small objects below

the bumper and may not detect objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor could result in serious

injury or death.

. The RearView Monitor is a conve-

nience but it is not a substitute for

proper backing up. Always turn and

check that it is safe to do so before

backing up. Always back up slowly.

. The system cannot completely elim-

inate blind spots and may not show

every object.

. Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView Monitor

because of its monitoring range

limitation. The system will not show

small objects below the bumper,

and may not show objects close to

the bumper or on the ground.

. Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

. Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite than

when viewed in the rearview and

outside mirrors.

. Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when cleaning

dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

HOW TO SWITCH DISPLAY

When the shift lever is moved into the R

(Reverse) position while another screen is

displayed, RearView Monitor operates and the

rear-wide view is displayed. When touching the

View key on the screen, the view on the screen

will change to the rear view screen. When the

View key is touched again, the rear-wide view

is displayed. The rear-wide view screen and/or

rear view screen switches to another screen

when the shift lever is moved out of the R

(Reverse) position.

The predictive course lines and the guid-

ing lines are not displayed on the rear-

wide view.

REAR AND REAR-WIDE VIEW MONITOR

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(233,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES (Only RearView Monitor)

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line *A are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

. Red line *1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line *2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line *3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line *4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines *5 :

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

predictive course lines *6 :

Indicate the predictive course when backing up.

The predictive course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the shift lever is in the "R"

(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is

turned. The predictive course lines will move

depending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the

steering wheel is in the neutral position.

How to adjust RearView screen

To adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Contrast

and Black Level of the RearView Monitor, press

with the RearView Monitor on,

select the Display key on the screen and select

the item key and adjust the level using the center

dial.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,

Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

ABOUT REARVIEW MONITOR

Difference between predicted and actual distances

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor is for

reference only and may be different from the

actual distance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

Monitor system 9-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(234,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

9-4 Monitor system

Backing up on a steep uphill:

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to

the place *A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)

distance on the hill is the place *B . Note that

any object on the hill is further than it appears on

the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill:

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown further than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to

the place *A , but the actual 1.0 m (3 ft)

distance on the hill is the place *B . Note that

any object on the hill is closer than it appears on

the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object:

The predictive course lines *A do not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may

hit the object if it projects over the actual

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(235,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting object:

The position *C is shown further than the

position *B in the display. However, the

position *C is actually at the same distance

as the position *A . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position *A if

the object projects over the actual backing up

course. WARNING

. Always turn and check that it is safe

to park your car before backing up.

Always back up slowly.

. Use the displayed lines as a refer-

ence. The lines are highly affected

by the number of occupants, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condi-

tion and road grade.

. If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predictive course

line may not be displayed correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predictive course line and the

actual course line.

. If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predictive

course lines may be displayed in-

correctly. If this occurs, drive the

vehicle on a straight road for more

than 5 minutes.

. When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC

position, the predictive course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

Monitor system 9-5

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(236,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

9-6 Monitor system

. The displayed line will appear

slightly off to the right because the

rear view camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

. The distance guide line and the

vehicle width guide line should be

used as a reference only when the

vehicle is on a level paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor

is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

. When backing up the vehicle up a

hill, objects viewed in the monitor

are further than they appear. When

backing up the vehicle down a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

closer than they appear. Use the

inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge dis-

tances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predictive course

lines are wider than the actual width and

course.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The RearView of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen *A as illustrated when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle, adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predictive course

lines *B enter the parking space *C .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines *D parallel to the

parking space *C while referring to the

predictive course lines.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(237,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P(Park) position and apply the parking

brake

OPERATING TIPS

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth dam-

pened with diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

. Do not use wax on the camera

window. Wipe off any wax with a

clean cloth dampened with mild

detergent diluted with water.

. When the shift lever is shifted to the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-

matically changes to the RearView Monitor

mode. However, the radio can be heard.

. It may take some time until the RearView

Monitor is displayed after the shift lever has

been shifted to R from another position or

to another position from R. Objects may be

distorted momentarily until the RearView

Monitor screen is displayed completely.

. When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects. This is not a malfunction.

. When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

. The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

. The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from those of

the actual object.

. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night. This is not a

malfunction.

. If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-

play objects. Clean the camera.

Display of predictive course lines can be set to

ON or OFF.

If the rearview monitor is not in operation, set

according to the following procedure.

1. Push .

2. Select [Others] and press .

3. Select [Camera] and press .

4. Select [Predictive Course Lines] and press

. The indicator illuminates when

the item is set.

Monitor system 9-7

CAMERA SETTINGS

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(238,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

9-8 Monitor system

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(239,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10 Multi function meter

About multi function meter ................................................... 10-2

Safety notes ....................................................................... 10-2

Multi function meter list ................................................... 10-2

Basic operation ....................................................................... 10-3

How to view the function meter screen...................... 10-3

How to switch screens ................................................... 10-5

Custom view screen .............................................................. 10-6

Selecting panel.................................................................. 10-6

Performance and vehicle information panel ............. 10-9

Driving support screen ...................................................... 10-17

Acceleration screen .................................................... 10-17

Braking screen ............................................................. 10-19

Steering screen............................................................ 10-20

Driving record screen ........................................................ 10-22

Stopwatch screen ....................................................... 10-22

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(240,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-2 Multi function meter

The multi function meter allows you to see the

vehicle status and the results of driving opera-

tion.

SAFETY NOTES

For your driving safety please read the following

warnings.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Operating the multi function meter

while driving can lead to a crash

resulting in serious injuries or

death. Always park the vehicle in a

safe place before operating the dis-

play screen.

. Look at the display screen only

briefly while driving. Keep your eyes

on the road. Inattentive driving may

lead to a crash resulting in serious

injuries or death.

INFO:

. The information displayed on the multi

function meter is for reference purposes

only. Due to road conditions and tempera-

ture, the information displayed by the system

may vary from actual driving conditions.

. You can select the units that the multi

function meter displays.

Language and unit settings

(page 7-8)

MULTI FUNCTION METER LIST

The following information can be displayed on

the multi function meter.

Performance and vehicle informa- tion

The driver can select up to six different meters to

be displayed.

WARNING

Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a reference

to make your driving more comfortable.

The readings are not meant to prevent

accidents caused by reckless driving or

poor driving conditions (due to weather,

road condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

ABOUT MULTI FUNCTION METER

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(241,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Trip calculator.

Stopwatch:

Displays the recorded driving time, vehicle

speed and elapsed time and saves the history

for each of these functions.

Push to display the multi func-

tion meter screen.

Information displayed on the multi function meter

display will differ depending on your intended

use of the display. You can choose to select the

meters that best suit your needs.

HOW TO VIEW THE FUNCTION ME- TER SCREEN

The vehicles display is divided into different

panels that display vehicle information.

Multi function meter 10-3

BASIC OPERATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(242,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-4 Multi function meter

Screen information

&1 Large panel:

Displays the vehicle information meter display,

digital display and gauge display. This feature is

only available in the 3-panel display mode. Touch

the panel to select another meter to display.

Performance and vehicle information pa-

nel (page 10-9)

&2 Small panel:

This display is simpler than the large display.

Touch the panel to select another meter to

display.

Performance and vehicle information pa-

nel (page 10-9)

&3 Screen number:

This number or letter identifies the screen that

you are currently viewing. Touch the screen

number to display the corresponding screen.

Select using touch panel (page 10-7)

&4 Screen switching:

Scrolls through the screens. Touch to return

to the previous screen. Touch to proceed to

the next screen.

Select using touch panel (page 10-7)

&5 Screen title:

Displays the title of the screen currently dis-

played.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(243,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

HOW TO SWITCH SCREENS

Operate the center dial or the touch panel to

select the screens that you would like to display

on the multi function meter screen.

Selecting screen using center dial

Turn the center dial and touch the screen that

you would like to display. The color of the page

you have chosen will change, and the multi

function meter screen will be displayed.

Selecting screen using touch panel

Selecting screen by number:

Select the screen that you would like to display.

The multi function meter screen you selected will

appear.

Selecting screen by scrolling through

screens:

Multi function meter 10-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(244,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-6 Multi function meter

Touch or . With each touch, the screens

will scroll through in order.

: The previous screen will be displayed.

: The next screen will be displayed.

This screen allows you to display the perfor-

mance and vehicle information, as needed, in

order for you to use your vehicle under optimum

conditions. You can display several vehicle

information panels at once. Each panel displays

digital gauges in the screen area.

SELECTING PANEL

Select the panel you would like to display and

then place it where you would like it to be

displayed. You can configure the screen to

display between 1 and 4 custom view panels.

Select using center dial

1. Display the panel you would to change and

push . The panel display will

change.

2. Select the panel you would like to change

and push . The meter selection

screen will be displayed.

3. Select the item you would like to display and

push . The displayed panel will

change.

CUSTOM VIEW SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(245,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Select using touch panel

1. Touch the screen number you would like to

change.

2. Touch the panel you would like to change.

The meter selection screen will be dis-

played.

3. Touch the item you would like to display. The

displayed panel will change.

Panel list

There is a difference between the items that you

can select as large or small panels.

Item Large panel Small panel

Engine Coolant Temperature X X

Engine Oil Temperature X X

Engine Oil Pressure X X

Transmission Oil Temperature X X

Transmission Oil Pressure X X

Boost X X

Speed X

Fuel/Range X X

Fuel Flow X X

Recent Fuel Economy X X

Torque split X

Accel pedal X

Multi function meter 10-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(246,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-8 Multi function meter

Item Large panel Small panel

Brake pedal X

Steering X

Accelerating G-Force X

Braking G-Force X

Cornering G-Force X X

Accel/Braking G-Force X X

Total G-Force X X

Clock X

Reset the CUSTOM VIEW #(1-4) to Default X X

INFO:

. Each panel selected will be saved.

. Panels will remain saved in the system even

after the engine is turned off.

. Two of the same panels cannot be displayed

at the same time.

. Two of the same panels of different sizes

cannot be displayed at the same time.

. Panels that have not been assigned a

display item remain empty.

Initializing display

The modified display will return to the screen

that was first configured.

1. Display the screen you would like to initialize

and push .

2. Select the panel and push .

3. Highlight [Reset the CUSTOM VIEW 1 to

Default] and push .

INFO:

When operating the touch panel to initialize the

display, the same procedure used to select a

meter is performed.

Select using touch panel (page 10-7)

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(247,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

PERFORMANCE AND VEHICLE IN- FORMATION PANEL

The appearance of each panel varies. The way

that large panels and small panels are displayed

also differs, even when the same mechanical

information is displayed.

Engine coolant temperature

Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

INFO:

. When this meter displays in red, reduce the

operating speed of the engine (RPMs) and

drive at a reduced speed.

. Driving while the engine coolant tempera-

ture is high may cause engine damage.

. When screens other than the FUNCTION

screen are displayed, the screen will not

change, even if the meter values register red

zone readings.

Engine oil temperature

Displays the engine oil temperature reading.

INFO:

. When this meter displays in red, reduce the

operating speed of the engine (RPMs) and

drive at a reduced speed.

. Driving while the engine oil temperature is

high may cause engine damage.

. When screens other than the FUNCTION

screen are displayed, the screen will not

change, even if the meter values register red

zone readings.

Engine oil pressure

Displays the engine oil pressure. The reading on

this dial will change based on the engine speed

(RPM) and oil temperature.

Multi function meter 10-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(248,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-10 Multi function meter

Transmission oil temperature

Displays the transmission oil temperature.

INFO:

. When the transmission oil temperature

increases to over 2848F (1408C) the color

of the meter display turns to red. However,

the vehicle can be driven until the tempera-

ture reaches 2958F (1468C). When the

color of the meter display turns red, because

the oil is deteriorated, replace the transmis-

sion and differential oil after driving.

. After first starting the engine, it may take a

short period of time for the oil temperature to

stabilize. This is not a malfunction.

. When screens other than the FUNCTION

screen are displayed, the screen will not

change, even if the meter values register red

zone readings.

Transmission oil pressure

Displays the transmission oil pressure.

INFO:

. The oil pressure gauge may momentarily

have a high reading, but this is a result of oil

pressure suppression and does not indicate

a malfunction.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(249,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. If the meter reads red frequently, have your

vehicle inspected at GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer.

. When screens other than the FUNCTION

screen are displayed, the screen will not

change, even if the meter values register red

zone readings.

Boost

Displays engine charging pressure.

Speed

Displays the vehicle speed. This can only be

displayed as a small panel.

Fuel/Range

Display the amount of fuel remaining and the

estimated cruising range.

NOTICE

Even when traveling a distance for

which there is a sufficient amount of

fuel, refuel when the gas gauge ap-

proaches empty or when the fuel warn-

ing light illuminates.

Fuel flow

Displays the amount of fuel injected into the

engine by the fuel injector.

Multi function meter 10-11

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(250,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-12 Multi function meter

Recent fuel economy

In the large panel, this meter displays the

timeline of fuel consumption for each minute

over the past twenty minutes. In the small panel,

this meter displays fuel consumption readings

over the past twenty seconds.

INFO:

. The small panel will display -.-:

when the vehicle is stopped

for the first few moments of driving

. The large panel will not display a graph while

the vehicle is stopped.

Torque split

Displays the amount of forward distributed

torque. This can only be displayed as a small

panel.

INFO:

Driving over a seam in the road may add front

torque, but this is not an anomaly.

Accel pedal

Displays the accelerator pedal position. This can

only be displayed as a small panel.

Brake pedal

Displays the brake pedal position. This can only

be displayed as a small panel.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(251,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

The reading that the brake meter displays when

the pedal is being depressed may vary, depend-

ing on the vehicle speed and road conditions.

The brake meter may not display a reading of

100% even when the brake is being fully

depressed. This is not a malfunction.

Steering

Displays the steering angle. This can only be

displayed as a small panel.

Small panel screen

INFO:

The amount of g-force exerted on the vehicle,

and displayed on the meter, will vary depending

on the driving speed.

Accelerating G-Force

Displays the direction of acceleration exerted on

the vehicle. The vertical readout illustrates the

progress of acceleration and the horizontal

readout tracks the acceleration timeline of the

past 20 seconds.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

Large panel screen

INFO:

. This panel only displays acceleration infor-

mation when the vehicle is accelerating. It

does not display any acceleration informa-

tion when the vehicle is decelerating.

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register G-Force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left of the panel

(large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Multi function meter 10-13

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(252,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-14 Multi function meter

Braking G-Force

Displays the direction of deceleration of the g-

force being exerted on the vehicle. The vertical

readout illustrates the decelerations of g-force,

and the horizontal readout tracks the timeline of

the past 20 seconds.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

Large panel screen

INFO:

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register g-force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left side of the

panel (large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Cornering G-Force

Displays the lateral g-force exerted on the

vehicle. In the large panel, this meter displays

readings for the past 20 seconds. In the small

panel, this meter displays the lateral g-force

being exerted on the vehicle at the time of the

reading. When turning to the left, the resulting g-

force is displayed on the right side of the screen.

When turning to the right, the resulting g-force

is displayed on the left side of the screen. The

red zone readings are configured to function as

a guide for smooth driving.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(253,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

by reckless driving.

INFO:

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register G-Force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left side of the

panel (large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Accel/Braking G-Force

Displays the fore/aft g-force exerted on the

vehicle. In the large panel, this meter displays

readings for the past 20 seconds. In the small

panel, this meter displays fore/aft g-force being

exerted on the vehicle at the time of the reading.

When accelerating, the resulting g-force is

displayed at the top of the panel. When

decelerating, the resulting g-force is displayed

at the bottom of the panel. The red zone

readings are configured to function as a guide

for smooth driving.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

Multi function meter 10-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(254,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-16 Multi function meter

INFO:

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register G-Force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left side of the

panel (large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Total G-Force

Displays the total combined G-Force exerted on

the vehicle. In the large panel, this meter

displays readings for the past 20 seconds. In

the small panel, this meter displays the total

combined G-Force being exerted on the vehicle

at the time of the reading. The red zone readings

are configured to function as a guide for smooth

driving.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

INFO:

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register G-Force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left side of the

panel (large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Clock

Displays the current time. This can only be

displayed as a small panel.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(255,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

. The displayed clock time is set by the GPS

system.

. The clock time may not be displayed on the

screen when the system is not receiving a

GPS signal, even when the system is set to

display the time.

. You can choose to display the clock in the

12-hour/24-hour format.

Clock settings (page 7-7)

ACCELERATION SCREEN

The acceleration screen displays the results of

how the vehicle behaves based on the manner in

which you operate the vehicle. The information

displayed is for confirmation purposes. The

results of how you use the accelerator pedal

can be displayed as an acceleration g-force

timeline. You can use this information to improve

your operation of the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

How to view screen

&1 ACCEL G (timeline graph):

Displays the acceleration exerted on the vehicle.

The vertical readout illustrates the progress of

acceleration and the horizontal readout tracks the

acceleration timeline of the past 20 seconds.

&2 Red zone display:

The color of the graph will change when the

vehicle accelerates beyond a preset level of g-

force.

&3 G-meter:

Displays the g-force currently being exerted on

the vehicle.

&41 BOOST:

Displays the engine charger pressure.

&5 ACCEL PEDAL:

Displays the accelerator pedal position.

Multi function meter 10-17

DRIVING SUPPORT SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(256,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-18 Multi function meter

INFO:

. This panel only displays acceleration infor-

mation when the vehicle is accelerating. It

does not display any acceleration informa-

tion when the vehicle is decelerating.

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register g-force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left of the panel

(large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Using result screens to improve driving

INFO:

This section explains how to use the driving

timeline screens. Use this information to make

your driving smoother.

Timeline and driving that show smooth

operation of accelerator pedal:

&1 Depressing the accelerator pedal slowly and

smoothly will result in a smoothly rising line.

&2 When depressing the accelerator gradually, the

angle of the line slopes gently upwards.

&3 As you bring the vehicle to a constant speed by

slowly stabilizing the angle of the accelerator

pedal, the acceleration panel will display this as a

gradually leveling horizontal line.

Displaying timeline of quick and sudden

acceleration and driving:

&1 Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal will

result in a steep climbing line.

&2 When the accelerator is being depressed quickly,

the angle of the line slopes upwards at a steep

angle.

&3 Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly will result

in a pointed line

&4 Here the accelerator is being depressed and

released repeatedly. The resulting line displayed

appears wavy. Repeatedly depressing and re-

leasing the accelerator pedal will result in a wavy

line.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(257,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

BRAKING SCREEN

The braking screen displays the results of how

the vehicle behaves based on the manner in

which the driver operates the vehicle. The

information displayed is for confirmation pur-

poses. The results of how the brake pedal is

used are displayed as a timeline of g-force

exerted on the vehicle during deceleration. Use

the information to improve your operation of the

brake pedal.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

How to view the screen

&1 BRAKE G (timeline graph):

Displays the deceleration of the g-force being

exerted on the vehicle. The vertical readout

illustrates the progress of deceleration and the

horizontal readout tracks the deceleration time-

line of the past 20 seconds.

&2 Red zone display:

The color of the graph will change when the level

of g-force exerted on the vehicle while decelerat-

ing exceeds a preset level.

&3 G-meter:

Displays the g-force currently being exerted due

on the vehicle due to deceleration.

&4 SPEED:

Displays the current driving speed.

&5 BRAKE PEDAL:

Displays the brake pedal position.

INFO:

. The reading that the brake meter displays

when the pedal is being depressed may

vary, depending on the vehicle speed and

road conditions. The brake meter may not

display a reading of 100% even when the

brake is being fully depressed. This is not a

malfunction.

. This panel only displays acceleration infor-

mation when the vehicle is decelerating. It

does not display any acceleration informa-

tion when the vehicle is accelerating.

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register g-force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction.

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left side of the

panel (large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Multi function meter 10-19

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(258,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-20 Multi function meter

Using result screens to improve driving

INFO:

This section explains how to use the driving

timeline screens. Use this information to make

your driving smoother.

Timeline and driving that show smooth

operation of brake pedal:

&1 Depressing the brake pedal slowly and smoothly

will result in a smoothly dropping line.

&2 By gradually depressing the brake pedal, the

angle of the line slopes gently downwards.

&3 Slowly releasing the brake pedal results in a

stable deceleration. The timeline display gradually

becomes a straight horizontal line.

&4 When you release the brake pedal slowly, the line

of the braking panel slopes gently upwards.

Timeline and driving that show sudden

operation of brake pedal:

&1 Because the brake pedal is being depressed

quickly, the angle of the line drops off at a steep

angle.

&2 Quick application of the brake pedal results in a

steep dropping line.

&3 When the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed

and released, the resulting line appears wavy.

&4 Because the brake pedal was depressed quickly

the vehicle stopped abruptly. The graph becomes

perpendicular to the time scale.

STEERING SCREEN

The steering screen allows you to confirm how

the vehicle responds to your driving by display-

ing the results of how you operate the vehicle.

The results of your driving are displayed as a

timeline of the g-force exerted on the vehicle.

Use the displayed information to improve your

steering smoothness.

WARNING

. Use the information from the multi

function meter strictly as a refer-

ence to make your driving more

comfortable. The readings are not

meant to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving or poor driving

conditions (due to weather, road

condition, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

. Red zone readings are configured to

function only as a guide for smooth

driving. The readings are not in-

tended to prevent accidents caused

by reckless driving.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(259,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

How to view screen

&1 CORNERING G (timeline graph of lateral g-

force):

Displays the lateral g-force exerted on the

vehicle. The horizontal readout displays lateral

g-force while the vertical readout displays a

timeline of the past 20 seconds of driving. G-

force exerted on the vehicle when turning left is

displayed on the right side of the screen. G-force

exerted on the vehicle when turning right is

displayed on the left side of the screen. The g-

force timeline will begin to scroll down auto-

matically after a short period of time.

&2 Red zone display:

The color of the graph will change when the level

of g-force exerted on the vehicle while decelerat-

ing exceeds a preset level.

&3 G-meter:

Displays the g-force currently being exerted on

the vehicle due to deceleration.

&4 SPEED:

Displays the current driving speed.

&5 STEERING:

Displays the angle of the steering wheel.

INFO:

. The extent to which the steering of the

vehicle is displayed on the meter may vary

depending on the vehicle speed.

. Due to the slope of a road, this meter may

register g-force even when the vehicle is

stopped. This is not a malfunction

. When the VDC or the ABS is activated, a

mark will appear on the far left side of the

panel (large panel only).

. The scale of the readout is adjusted auto-

matically to accommodate readings that

exceed the upper limit of the meter.

Using result screens to improve driving

This section explains how to use the driving

timeline screens. Use this information to make

your driving smoother.

INFO:

The criteria for smooth driving may vary depend-

ing on road conditions. Use this information for

reference purposes only.

Timeline and driving that show smooth

handling when driving through S-curve:

&1 Turn the steering wheel slowly and the angle of

the graph slopes gently.

&2 Turning the wheel slowly through the turn will

result in a smooth, curving line.

Multi function meter 10-21

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(260,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-22 Multi function meter

&3 By turning the steering wheel slowly back to its

previous position, the line on the graph timeline

returns to its standard position and the vehicle

stabilizes.

Timeline and driving that show sudden

turning of steering wheel:

&1 Because the wheel is turned quickly, the buildup

of the line is very sudden.

&2 When the wheel is turned back quickly, the

resulting line appears as a point.

&3 When the steering wheel is being turned in an

erratic manner, the vehicle is veering abruptly.

Because of this, the line on the panel fluctuates

without settling.

This allows you to measure/display the timeline

and waypoint history over a given time.

STOPWATCH SCREEN

With the STOP WATCH screen you can

measure a segment of time or passing time.

You can also display and save recorded time-

lines and data.

How to view screen

&1 TIME LOG:

Prominently displays the current time being

measured. The measured times are displayed in

a list. The system can store up to 99 items in its

memory.

&2 Timer-on indicator:

The timer-on indicator will flash when the stop-

watch function is active.

&3 SPEED:

Displays the vehicle speed while driving.

&4 ELAPSED TIME:

Displays the total elapsed time measured since

the stopwatch function was started.

Measuring timed distance

To measure the timed distance, use

STOP> or on the steering switch.

1. With the STOP WATCH screen displayed,

push . The timer-on in-

dicator will flash when the stopwatch func-

tion is active.

DRIVING RECORD SCREEN

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(261,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

2. Each time you push the displayed

time will be recorded into the system and

will be viewable in the list.

3. Push . The stopwatch

function will stop timing.

INFO:

. The STOP WATCH function can only be

used when the clock is activated.

. If using the drivers notes, the STOP

WATCH function is unavailable. To use the

STOP WATCH function, first finish using the

drivers notes.

. If the ignition is in the OFF position, you will

not be able to use the STOP WATCH

function.

. If the ignition is put into the ACC or the OFF

position while using the timer, timing will

end.

. The timer will continue timing while you

display other screens until you push

.

. The maximum time that the system timer can

display is a recorded time of up to 9 hours

59 minutes and 59.99 seconds.

. When timing has finished, the upper timer

will reset to 00:00.0

. When the recorded time and the finished

recording time are displayed, they tempora-

rily interrupt the time recorder display and

are displayed in large numbers. The re-

corded time will disappear automatically

after 5-10 seconds.

. When screens other than the multi function

meter are displayed, the STOP WATCH

screen will not interrupt the display.

Checking timed distance list

You can review the list of past measured times.

1. Select [TIME LOG]. The list screen will be

displayed.

2. Select the record you would like to display.

The menu screen will be displayed.

Multi function meter 10-23

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(262,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-24 Multi function meter

3. Select [Stop Watch Times]. The details of

the selected record will be displayed.

INFO:

You can use either the center dial or the touch

panel to scroll through the list.

Saving to USB device

You can save the time records saved in the

system onto a USB device.

1. Insert the USB device in the media slot.

2. Select [TIME LOG]. The list screen will be

displayed.

3. Select the record you would like to display.

The menu screen will be displayed.

4. Select [Transfer Stop Watch data to USB

Memory]. The time record is saved to the

USB device.

NOTICE

Inserting objects other than a USB

device into the USB connector can

cause damage. Do not insert anything

other than a USB device into the USB

connector.

INFO:

. Time records are saved to the USB device in

the CSV format.

. While records are being saved to the USB

device, do not change the key position or

remove the USB device.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(263,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. To save all records to the USB device, select

[Transfer All Stop Watch Times to USB

Mem.].

Deleting records

Use the following procedure to delete time

records saved in the system.

1. Select [TIME LOG]. The list screen will be

displayed.

2. Select the record you would like to display.

The menu screen will be displayed.

3. Select [Delete Stop Watch data]. The

message screen will be displayed.

4. Select [Yes]. The time record will be deleted.

INFO:

. You cannot recover deleted records.

. To delete all records select [Delete All Stop

Watch data].

Multi function meter 10-25

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(264,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

10-26 Multi function meter

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(265,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11 General system information

Current vehicle location ........................................................ 11-2

Display of current vehicle location ............................... 11-2

What is GPS (Global Positioning System)? ............. 11-2

Incorrect display of vehicle position............................. 11-3

Detailed Map Coverage Areas (MCA) for navigation system.............................................................. 11-5

When gray road is displayed on map ......................... 11-6

Route calculation .................................................................... 11-6

Route guidance ....................................................................... 11-8

Basics of voice guidance ............................................... 11-8

Directions provided and distances to guide points ... 11-8

Repeating voice guidance ........................................... 11-10

Notes on voice guidance........................................... 11-10

Notes on NavTraffic information ...................................... 11-11

Notes on NavWeatherXM information ........................... 11-12

Map data ............................................................................... 11-13

How to order map data updates ............................. 11-13

About map icons.......................................................... 11-13

About map data ........................................................... 11-13

End-user terms............................................................. 11-14

How to handle display ....................................................... 11-16

Characteristics of liquid crystal display.................. 11-16

Maintenance of display............................................... 11-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(266,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-2 General system information

DISPLAY OF CURRENT VEHICLE LOCATION

This navigation system combines the data

obtained from the vehicle (by gyro sensor) and

from GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites

to calculate the current location of the vehicle.

This position is then displayed throughout route

guidance to a destination.

WHAT IS GPS (Global Positioning System)?

GPS is a position detecting system that uses

satellites deployed by the U.S. government. This

navigation system receives radio signals from

three or more different satellites that orbit

13,049 miles (21,000 km) above the earth in

space, and detects the position of the vehicle by

utilizing the principle of triangulation.

Positioning adjustment

When the system judges that the vehicle

position information is not accurate based on

vehicle speed and gyro sensor data calculations,

the system will automatically adjust the position

of the vehicle icon using GPS signals.

Receiving signals from GPS satel- lites

The reception of GPS signals can be weak,

depending on the environment. Vehicles in the

following areas/environments may not receive

GPS signals (indicator color: gray).

* Inside tunnels or parking garages

* Areas with numerous tall buildings

* Under multi-layered highways

* Under many large trees

CURRENT VEHICLE LOCATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(267,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

* In a canyon

INFO:

The GPS antenna is located on the instrument

panel inside the vehicle. Do not place any

objects, especially mobile phones or transcei-

vers, on the instrument panel. Because the

strength of the GPS signal is approximately one

billionth of that of TV waves, phones and

transceivers will affect or may totally disrupt

the signal.

Display of GPS information

GPS information can be displayed.

Viewing GPS current location informa-

tion (page 6-22)

NOTICE

Route guidance provided by the naviga-

tion system does not take carpool lane

driving into consideration, especially

when carpool lanes are separated from

other road lanes.

INCORRECT DISPLAY OF VEHICLE POSITION

The following cases may affect the display

accuracy of the vehicles position or traveling

direction. The accuracy will return to normal if

the driving conditions return to normal.

* When there is a similar road nearby.

* When the vehicle is traveling in an area with a

grid pattern road system.

General system information 11-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(268,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-4 General system information

* When the vehicle is passing through a large Y-

shaped intersection/junction.

* When the vehicle is traveling on a continuous,

slowly curving road.

* When the vehicle is traveling on a road with

repeating S-shaped curves.

* When the vehicle is on a loop bridge.

* When the vehicle is on a snow-covered or

unpaved road.

* When repeatedly turning left or right, or driving in

zigzags.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(269,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

* When the vehicle is rotated on a parking lot

turntable while the ignition switch is off.

* When driving on a road not displayed on the map

screen or a road that has been changed due to

additional construction or other reasons.

* When the GPS positioning accuracy is low.

INFO:

. The vehicle icon may be misaligned when

starting the vehicle just after starting the

engine.

. The vehicle icon may also be misaligned if

different sized tires or tire chains are

installed.

. The system has a function that automatically

corrects the vehicle icon position when it is

misaligned from the actual position.

. Vehicle position correction by GPS may not

function when the vehicle is stopped.

. If the vehicle icon position does not return to

normal even after driving for a while, correct

the vehicle icon position manually.

Adjusting current vehicle location

(page 2-95)

DETAILED MAP COVERAGE AREAS (MCA) FOR NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This system is designed to help guiding to the

destination, and it also performs other functions

as outlined in this manual. However, the system

must be used safely and properly. Information

concerning road conditions, traffic signs and the

availability of services may not always be up-to-

date. The system is not a substitute for safe,

proper and legal driving. Map data covers select

metropolitan areas in the United States and

Canada.

Map data includes two types of areas: Detailed

coverage areas providing all detailed road data

and other areas showing Main roads only.

NOTICE

Detailed map data is not available in

many areas and is generally limited to

select major metropolitan areas.

General system information 11-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(270,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-6 General system information

WHEN GRAY ROAD IS DISPLAYED ON MAP

. When you are driving on a road displayed in

gray after the vehicle has deviated from the

suggested route during route guidance,

automatic rerouting may not start immedi-

ately.

. The navigation system does not provide

route guidance for roads displayed in dark

green. Therefore, if the destination is set on

a road displayed in dark green, the enlarged

map display will return to the ordinary map

screen at some point on a suggested route

that is near the destination. Also, voice

guidance will stop at some point on a

suggested route that is near the destination.

. Places information and street names near

roads displayed in gray may not be con-

tained in the map data.

. There may be cases that carpool lanes are

included on a suggested route when the

automatic rerouting function is activated,

even if the Use Time Restricted Roads is

turned off.

Setting conditions for route calcula-

tion (page 2-65)

. The navigation system does not provide

route guidance for roads displayed in dark

green.

. If the destination is set on a dark green road,

the enlarged map display will switch to the

ordinary map screen at some point and

suggest a route that is near the destination.

The distance and direction to the endpoint

of the suggested route will be displayed in

the lower right corner of the screen. Also, at

this time, voice guidance will announce,

The route to the destination includes roads

through incomplete map areas. Voice gui-

dance will not be provided in these areas.

When approaching the endpoint of the

suggested route, voice guidance will an-

nounce, Entering the road with incomplete

map data. Use the direction arrow and

distance information to proceed to your

destination.

To reach the destination, refer to the map

screen. Always follow actual roads and

regulations and drive safely.

. The suggested route may not be the short-

est, nor are other circumstances such as

traffic jams considered.

. Because of the inevitable difference in road

conditions and circumstances between the

time you use this system and the time the

information was produced for the map data,

there may be discrepancies in roads and

regulations. In such cases, follow the actual

information available.

. During route calculation, the map will not

scroll, however the vehicle icon will move

with the actual vehicles movement.

. During route calculation, buttons such as

and and the center dial

will be disabled.

. In some cases, after the calculation is

complete, the calculated route may not be

immediately displayed.

. Waypoints that have been passed will be

disregarded by rerouting calculation.

. If you scroll the map while the suggested

route is being drawn, it may take more time

to finish drawing.

. If waypoints are set, the system calculates

multiple routes between waypoints simulta-

neously, and the following may result.

ROUTE CALCULATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(271,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

If one section between waypoints cannot

be calculated, none of the route will be

displayed.

The route may not connect completely at

some waypoints.

The route may require a U-turn close to

some waypoints.

. Route calculation may not be completed in

the following cases.

If there is no main road within a range of

1.5 miles (2.5 km) from the vehicle, a

message saying so will appear on the

screen. Try recalculating when the vehi-

cle is closer to a main road.

If there is no main road within a range of

1.5 miles (2.5 km) from the destination or

waypoint, a message saying so will

appear on the screen. Try setting the

location closer to a main road.

If the vehicle is too close to the destina-

tion or if there are no roads to the

destination, a message saying so will

appear on the screen.

If it is impossible to reach the destination

or waypoints because of traffic regula-

tions, etc.

If the only route to reach the destination

or waypoints is extremely complicated.

If the destination, current vehicle position

or waypoint is within the Avoid Area.

If a part of the route is included in the

Avoid Area.

. The following may occur when the route is

displayed.

If you calculate a route on a main road,

the starting point of the route may not

exactly match the current vehicle loca-

tion.

The endpoint of the route may not exactly

match the destination.

If you calculate a route on a main road,

the system may display a route from

another main road. This may be because

the position of the vehicle icon is not

accurate. In this case, park the vehicle in

a safe location and reset the vehicle icon,

or continue driving to see if the position

of the vehicle icon is automatically

adjusted before recalculating the route.

There are cases in which the system

shows an indirect route to reach the

destination or waypoints, if you set them

from stored or facility information. In

order to correct this, you must be careful

about the traffic direction, especially

when lanes with different travel directions

are shown separately, such as inter-

changes and service areas.

This system makes no distinction be-

tween limited traffic control and total

control (blockage). It may show an

indirect route even if the road is usable.

Even if the freeway preference is set to

OFF, a route that uses the freeway may

be suggested.

Even if the ferry preference is set to OFF,

a route that uses a ferry line may be

suggested.

Ferry lines, excluding those that are only

for pedestrians, bicycles and motor-

cycles, are stored in this system. Take

into consideration the travel time required

and operational condition before decid-

ing whether to use them or not.

General system information 11-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(272,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-8 General system information

INFO:

The system will only announce street names

when the system language is set to English.

Street names are not announced when the

system is set to Francais (French).

BASICS OF VOICE GUIDANCE

Voice guidance announces which direction to

turn when approaching an intersection in which

a turn is necessary.

NOTICE

. There may be some cases in which

voice guidance and actual road

conditions do not correspond. This

may occur because of discrepancies

between the actual road and the

information on the map data, or it is

due to the vehicles speed.

. In case voice guidance does not

correspond to the actual road con-

ditions, follow the information ob-

tained from traffic signs or notices

on the road.

. Route guidance provided by the

navigation system does not take

carpool lane driving into considera-

tion, especially when carpool lanes

are separated from other road

lanes.

DIRECTIONS PROVIDED AND DIS- TANCES TO GUIDE POINTS

Directions will differ, depending on the road

type.

Notification of intersection on or- dinary road

1. In about one quarter mile (400 meters),

right (left) turn.

2. Right (left) turn ahead.

Notification of consecutive inter- sections on ordinary roads

When the road has three or more consecutive

intersections ahead, voice guidance will an-

nounce the following.

1. In about one quarter mile (400 meters),

right (left) turn, then in about one quarter

mile (100 meters) left (right) turn.

2. Left (right) turn ahead, then in about one

quarter mile (100 meters) right (left) turn.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(273,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Notification of freeway entrance

1. In about one quarter mile (400 meters)

freeway entrance on your right onto (road

number and direction).

2. Freeway entrance on your right onto (road

number and direction).

Notification of freeway junction

1. In about one mile (1.6 kilometers), keep to

the right (left) onto (road number and

direction), then in about one quarter mile

(400 meters) keep to the right (left).

2. Keep to the right (left) onto (road number

and direction), then in about one quarter

mile (400 meters) keep to the right (left)

onto (road number and direction).

3. Keep to the right (left) onto (road number

and direction).

Notification of freeway exit

General system information 11-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(274,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-10 General system information

1. In about one mile (1.6 kilometers), exit on

your right.

2. Take the second exit on your right.

Notification when approaching des- tination

Ordinary road:

When approaching the destination, voice gui-

dance will announce, You have arrived at your

destination. Ending route guidance. To finally

reach your destination, refer to the map screen.

Dark green road:

After passing the last turning point on a

suggested route, voice guidance will announce,

The route to your destination includes roads

through incomplete map areas. Voice guidance

will not be provided in these areas. When

approaching the endpoint of the suggested

road, voice guidance will announce, Entering

the road with incomplete map data. Please use

the direction arrow and distance information to

proceed to your destination.

REPEATING VOICE GUIDANCE

This function is available throughout route

guidance, from the time after the route calcula-

tion is completed until the vehicle arrives at the

destination. Push VOICE>. Voice

guidance will be repeated.

INFO:

. If VOICE> is pushed when the

vehicle is deviating from the suggested

route and when the automatic reroute

function is off, voice guidance will announce,

Proceed to the highlighted route.

. If VOICE> is pushed when the

vehicle is going in the wrong direction, voice

guidance will announce: Please make a

legal U-turn if possible.

NOTES ON VOICE GUIDANCE

. Voice guidance in this system should be

regarded as a supplementary function.

When driving the vehicle, check the route

on the map and follow the actual roads and

traffic regulations.

. Voice guidance is activated only for inter-

sections with certain conditions. There may

be cases that the vehicle has to turn, but

voice guidance is not provided.

. Voice guidance contents may vary, depend-

ing on the direction of the turn and the type

of intersection.

. The voice guidance timing will vary depend-

ing on the situation.

. When the vehicle has deviated from the

suggested route, voice guidance is not

available. The system will not announce this.

Refer to the map and recalculate the route.

Recalculate route (page 2-62)

. Voice guidance may not accurately corre-

spond with road numbers and directions at

freeway junctions.

. Voice guidance may not accurately corre-

spond to street names at freeway exits.

. The displayed street names may sometimes

differ from the actual names, or UN-

KNOWN STREET NAME may be dis-

played.

. Voice guidance is not available when the

[Guidance Voice] is turned off.

Volume adjustment (page 7-6)

. Voice guidance will start when the vehicle

enters the suggested route. Refer to the

map for directions to the starting point of the

route.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(275,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

. When approaching a waypoint, voice gui-

dance will announce, You have arrived at

waypoint 1 (2, 3, 4,...). Voice guidance will

switch to the next section of the route. When

voice guidance is not available, refer to the

map for directions.

. In some cases, voice guidance ends before

arrival at the destination. Refer to the

destination icon on the map to reach the

destination.

. If the system recognizes on which side the

destination (waypoint) is located, voice

guidance will announce on the right/left

after announcing the arrival at the destina-

tion.

. Voice guidance may be partially operational

or inoperative due to the angle of roads at an

intersection.

. Because freeway lane information is avail-

able only for approximately 7,000 major

freeways in North America, it is not possible

to display information for all junctions and

exits.

. Freeway exit information may differ from the

information on the actual exit signs.

. Because it is not possible to consider data

concerning roads that are seasonally avail-

able or unavailable, a route may be displayed

that does not match the actual traffic

restrictions. Be sure to follow the actual

traffic restrictions while driving.

. Canada and Alaska contain many roads with

incomplete map data. As a result, when

searching for a route, the route may include

roads with incomplete data. In regions

where road data is not complete, voice

guidance may stop for long periods of time.

Be sure to follow the actual traffic restric-

tions while driving.

. The NavTraffic information service is not

provided for some cities. In addition, the

cities for which the traffic information service

is provided may be changed.

. In some cases, infrastructure problems may

prevent the complete display of the traffic

information. This is not a malfunction.

. Due to infrastructure problems, or due to the

time when the traffic information service

broadcast is received, the displayed infor-

mation may differ from the actual traffic

conditions.

. Depending on the traffic information, a

detour route may be slower than the original

route.

. NavTraffic is a service of SiriusXM Satellite

Radio. NavTraffic is only available in select

markets and is subject to data availability.

Reception of the SiriusXM signal may vary

depending on location. It requires a monthly

premium subscription. The service provider

is solely responsible for the quality and

accuracy of the information provided. All

fees and programming are subject to

change. For more details on the NavTraffic

service, terms and conditions, please visit

www.siriusxm.com/navtraffic.

You can also contact SiriusXM Satellite

Radio at 1-866-635-2349.

General system information 11-11

NOTES ON NavTraffic INFORMATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(276,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-12 General system information

. As of January 31, 2009, the NavTraffic

service covers 80 major metropolitan mar-

kets. For the most current list of markets

covered, please refer to www.siriusxm.com/

navtraffic, or call SiriusXM Satellite Radio

customer support at 1-866-635-2349.

. Due to road maintenance, infrastructure

problems (e.g. malfunction of road sensors,

outage of central computer of infrastructure)

or natural disasters, there are times when

some or all traffic information may not be

available.

. Incident information is based on human

collection. Not all incidents that have hap-

pened are collected and provided.

. Due to infrastructure problems, or transmis-

sion delay, there are times when the

information may differ from the actual con-

dition. Always observe safe driving practices

and follow all traffic regulations.

. Due to the coverage and quality of traffic

information and road conditions, it is not

always possible for the system to provide

the shortest time route even when traffic

information is considered.

. Traffic information that is displayed may

differ from information from other media

(e.g., radio), as other media may use

different information sources.

. The NavWeatherXM information service is

not provided for some cities. In addition, the

cities for which the weather information

service is provided may be changed.

. In some cases, infrastructure problems may

prevent the complete display of the weather

information. This is not a malfunction.

. Due to infrastructure problems, or due to the

time when the weather information service

broadcast is received, the displayed infor-

mation may differ from the actual weather

conditions.

. NavWeatherXM is a service of SiriusXM

Satellite Radio. NavWeatherXM is only

available in select markets and is subject

to data availability. Reception of the Sir-

iusXM signal may vary depending on loca-

tion. It requires a monthly premium

subscription. The service provider is solely

responsible for the quality and accuracy of

the information provided. All fees and

programming are subject to change. For

more details on the NavWeatherXM service,

terms and conditions, please visit

www.siriusxm.com/navweather.

You can also contact SiriusXM Satellite

Radio at 1-866-635-2349.

. NavWeatherXM is designed to provide real-

time weather and forecasting information in

your general vicinity. Discrepancies may be

encountered between the system and your

actual location. Road system and weather

changes may affect the accuracy of the

information provided. Rely on your common

sense to decide whether to follow a

specified route. Detailed coverage is not

available in every city or roadway.

NOTES ON NavWeatherXM INFORMATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(277,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

HOW TO ORDER MAP DATA UP- DATES

To order updated map data, contact the

NISSAN NAVIGATION SYSTEM HELPDESK.

See the contact information on the inside front

cover of this manual.

ABOUT MAP ICONS

The marks of companies displayed by this

product to indicate business locations are the

marks of their respective owners. The use of

such marks in this product does not imply any

sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such

companies of this product.

ABOUT MAP DATA

1. This map data has been prepared by

HITACHI, LTD. under licence from ZENRIN

CO., LTD. and HERE. ZENRIN CO., LTD.

has added, processed and digitized data

based on the digital road map data of

Navigation Technologies Corporation. Due

to the production timing of the map data,

some new roads may not be included in this

map data or some of the names or roads

may be different from those at the time you

use this map data.

2. Traffic control and regulation data used in

this map data may be different from those at

the time you use this map data due to the

data production timing. When driving your

vehicle, follow the actual traffic control signs

and notices on the roads.

3. Reproducing or copying this map software

is strictly prohibited by law.

Published by Nissan North America, Inc.

*C 2006 Navigation Technologies. All rights

reserved.

Certain business data provided by infoUSA, Inc.,

Omaha, NE, Copyright

*C 1987-2012 HERE. All Rights Reserved.

*C 2008, All Rights Reserved.

*C ZENRIN CO., LTD. 2009. All rights reserved.

*C ZENRIN USA, INC. 2008. All rights reserved.

*C 2008 Zagat Survey, LLC.

WARNING

. This navigation system should not

be used to replace your own judge-

ment. No itinerary suggested by this

navigation system should ever over-

ride any highway regulations, your

own judgement, or a knowledge of

safe driving practices. Do not follow

the navigation systems suggested

itinerary if it would cause you to

perform a dangerous or illegal act,

place you in a dangerous situation,

or take you into an area you con-

sider unsafe.

. The advice provided by the naviga-

tion system is to be regarded as a

suggestion only. There may be

times when the navigation system

displays the vehicles location in-

correctly, fails to suggest the short-

est route, or fails to direct you to the

your desired destination. In such

instances, rely on your own driving

judgement, taking into account the

driving conditions at the time.

. Do not use the navigation system to

locate emergency services. The da-

tabase does not contain a complete

listing of emergency services such

as police stations, fire halls, hospi-

tals and walk-in clinics. Please

show discretion and ask for direc-

tions in such instances.

General system information 11-13

MAP DATA

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(278,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-14 General system information

. As the driver, you alone are respon-

sible for your driving safety.

In order to avoid a traffic acci-

dent, do not operate the system

while driving.

In order to avoid a traffic acci-

dent, operate the system only

when the vehicle is stopped at a

safe place and the parking

brake is on.

In order to avoid a traffic acci-

dent or traffic offence, remem-

ber that actual road conditions

and traffic regulations take pre-

cedence over the information

contained on the navigation sys-

tem.

The Software may contain inac-

curate or incomplete informa-

tion due to the passage of

time, changing circumstances,

and the sources of information

used. Please respect current

traffic conditions and regula-

tions at all times while driving.

Where actual road conditions

and highway regulations differ

from the information contained

on the navigation system, abide

by the highway regulations.

Keep the amount of time spent

viewing the screen while driving

to a strict minimum.

The navigation system does not provide,

nor represent in any way information on:

traffic and highway regulations; technical

aspects of the vehicle including weight,

height, width, load and speed limits; road

conditions including grade, percentage of

incline and surface conditions; obstacles

such as the height and width of bridges

and tunnels; and other current driving or

road conditions. Always rely on your own

judgement when driving a car, taking into

account current driving conditions.

The marks of companies displayed by this

product to indicate business locations are the

marks of their respective owners. The use of

such marks in this product does not imply any

sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such

companies of this product.

END-USER TERMS

The data (Data) is provided for your personal,

internal use only and not for resale. It is

protected by copyright, and is subject to the

following terms and conditions which are agreed

to by you, on the one hand, and HITACHI

(HITACHI) and its licensors (including their

licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.

*C 1987-2012 HERE. All rights reserved.

The Data for areas of Canada includes informa-

tion taken with permission from Canadian

authorities, including: *C Her Majesty the Queen

in Right of Canada, *C Queens Printer for

Ontario, *C Canada Post Corporation, Geo-

Base.

HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the

United States Postal Service to publish and

sell ZIP+4 information.

*C United States Postal Service 2008. Prices

are not established, controlled or approved by

the United States Postal Service. The following

trademarks and registrations are owned by the

USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and

ZIP+4.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(279,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Terms and conditions

Personal Use Only. You agree to use this Data

together with Nissan Automotive Products for

the solely personal, non-commercial purposes

for which you were licensed, and not for service

bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes.

Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set

forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy

this Data only as necessary for your personal

use to (i) view it, and (ii) save it, provided that

you do not remove any copyright notices that

appear and do not modify the Data in any way.

You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,

modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse

engineer any portion of this Data, and may not

transfer or distribute it in any form, for any

purpose, except to the extent permitted by

mandatory laws. Multi-disc sets may only be

transferred or sold as a complete set as

provided by HITACHI and not as a subset

thereof.

Restrictions. Except where you have been

specifically licensed to do so by HITACHI, and

without limiting the preceding paragraph, you

may not (a) use this Data with any products,

systems, or applications installed or otherwise

connected to or in communication with vehicles,

capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dis-

patch, real time route guidance, fleet manage-

ment or similar applications; or (b) with or in

communication with any positioning devices or

any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or

computer devices, including without limitation

cellular phones, palmtop and handheld compu-

ters, pagers, and personal digital assistants or

PDAs.

Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or

incomplete information due to the passage of

time, changing circumstances, sources used

and the nature of collecting comprehensive

geographic data, any of which may lead to

incorrect results.

No Warranty. This Data is provided to you as

is, and you agree to use it at your own risk.

HITACHI and its licensors (and their licensors

and suppliers) make no guarantees, representa-

tions or warranties of any kind, express or

implied, arising by law or otherwise, including

but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy,

completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness

for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or

results to be obtained from this Data, or that the

Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: HITACHI AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS

AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRAN-

TIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,

PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

NONINFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories

and Countries do not allow certain warranty

exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion

may not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: HITACHI AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS

AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO

YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND

OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE

OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR

ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR

DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH

MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSES-

SION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY

LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS

OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CON-

SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF

YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS

INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFOR-

MATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE

TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED

ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF HITACHI OR ITS

LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some

States, Territories and Countries do not allow

certain liability exclusions or damages limita-

tions, so to that extent the above may not apply

General system information 11-15

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(280,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-16 General system information

to you.

Export Control. You agree not to export from

anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or

any direct product thereof except in compliance

with, and with all licenses and approvals

required under, applicable export laws, rules

and regulations.

Entire Agreement. These terms and condi-

tions constitute the entire agreement between

HITACHI (and its licensors, including their

licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to

the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in

their entirety any and all written or oral agree-

ments previously existing between us with

respect to such subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms and condi-

tions shall be governed by the laws of the State

of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of

laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations

Convention for Contracts for the International

Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You

agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of

Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and

actions arising from or in connection with the

Data provided to you hereunder.

Government End Users. If the Data is being

acquired by or on behalf of the United States

government or any other entity seeking or

applying rights similar to those customarily

claimed by the United States government, HERE

Data (hereinafter Data) is a commercial item

as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (FAR)

2.101, is licensed in accordance with ENDU-

SER TERMS, and each copy of the Data

delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked

and embedded as appropriate with the following

Notice of Use, and shall be treated in

accordance with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: 425 West Randolph St., Chicago,

Illinois 60606

This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to END-USER TERMS under

which this Data was provided.

*C 1987-2012 HERE - All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federal government

agency, or any federal official refuses to use the

legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer,

federal government agency, or any federal

official must notify HERE prior to seeking

additional or alternative rights in the Data.

The display is a liquid crystal display and should

be handled with care.

WARNING

Never disassemble the display. Some

parts utilize extremely high voltage.

Touching them may result in serious

personal injury.

CHARACTERISTICS OF LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

. If the temperature inside the vehicle is

especially low, the display will stay relatively

dim or the movement of the images may be

slow. These conditions are normal. The

display will function normally when the

interior of the vehicle has warmed up.

. Some pixels in the display are darker or

brighter than others. This condition is an

inherent characteristic of liquid crystal dis-

plays, and it is not a malfunction.

. A remnant of the previous display image may

remain on the screen. This screen burn is

inherent in displays, and it is not a malfunc-

tion.

HOW TO HANDLE DISPLAY

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(281,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

INFO:

The screen may become distorted by strong

magnetic fields.

MAINTENANCE OF DISPLAY

CAUTION

. To clean the display, never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thin-

ner and any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning

agent. They will scratch or deterio-

rate the panel.

. Do not splash any liquid such as

water or car fragrance on the dis-

play. Contact with liquid will cause

the system to malfunction.

To clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth.

If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small

amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth.

Never spray the screen with water or detergent.

Dampen the cloth first, then wipe the screen.

General system information 11-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(282,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-18 General system information

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(283,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

MEMO

General system information 11-19

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(284,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

11-20 General system information

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(285,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12 Troubleshooting guide

Customer assistance ............................................................. 12-2

Navigation ................................................................................. 12-3

Basic operations ............................................................... 12-3

Vehicle icon ........................................................................ 12-4

Route calculation and visual guidance........................ 12-6

Voice guidance .................................................................. 12-8

Traffic information ........................................................... 12-9

Audio system........................................................................ 12-10

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ........................ 12-11

Voice recognition ................................................................ 12-12

Monitor system .................................................................... 12-13

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(286,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-2 Troubleshooting guide

For assistance or inquiries about the NISSAN

Navigation System, or to order updated map

data, contact the NISSAN NAVIGATION SYS-

TEM HELPDESK. See the contact information

on the inside front cover of this manual.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(287,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

BASIC OPERATIONS

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

No image is displayed. The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.

The system in the video mode. Push on the control panel to change the

mode.

3. Audio system

The display is turned off. Push < OFF> to turn on the display.

No voice guidance is available. or The volume is too high or too low.

The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.

Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets (roads displayed in gray).

This is not a malfunction.

No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Push .

The screen is too dim. The movement is slow. The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low. Wait until the interior of the vehicle has warmed up.

Some pixels in the display are darker or brighter than others.

This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid crystal displays.

This is not a malfunction.

Some menu items cannot be selected. Some menu items become unavailable while the vehicle is driven.

Park the vehicle in a safe location, and then operate the navigation system.

Troubleshooting guide 12-3

NAVIGATION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(288,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-4 Troubleshooting guide

VEHICLE ICON

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Names of roads and locations differ between Plan View and BirdviewTM.

This is because the quantity of the displayed information is reduced so that the screen does not become too crowded. There is also a chance that names of the roads or locations may be displayed multiple times, and the names appearing on the screen may be different because of a processing procedure.

This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle icon is not displayed in the correct position.

The vehicle was transported after the ignition switch was pushed off, for example, by a ferry or car transporter.

Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where GPS signals can be received.

The position and direction of the vehicle icon may be incorrect depending on the driving environments and the levels of positioning accuracy of the navigation system.

This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for a while to automatically correct the position and direction of the vehicle icon.

Current vehicle location (page 11-2)

When the vehicle is traveling on a new road, the vehicle icon is located on another road nearby.

Because the new road is not stored in the map data, the system automatically places the vehicle icon on the nearest road available.

Updated road information will be included in the next version of the map data.

The screen does not switch to the night screen even after turning on the head- lights.

The daytime screen was set the last time the headlights were turned on. Set the screen to the night screen mode using

< OFF> when turning on the headlights.

Display settings (page 7-4)

The map does not scroll even when the vehicle is moving.

The current location map screen is not displayed. Push .

The vehicle icon is not displayed. The current location map screen is not displayed. Push .

The GPS indicator on the screen remains gray.

GPS signals cannot be received under certain conditions, such as in a parking garage, on a road with many tall buildings, etc.

Drive on an open, straight road for a while.

GPS signals cannot be received because objects are placed on the instrument panel.

Remove the objects from the instrument panel.

A sufficient number of GPS satellites is not available. Wait for the satellites to move to locations available for the navigation system.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(289,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The location of the vehicle icon is misaligned from the actual position.

When using tire chains or replacing the tires, speed calculations based on the speed sensor may be incorrect.

Drive the vehicle for a while (at approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h) for about 30 minutes) to auto- matically correct the vehicle icon position. If this does not correct the vehicle icon position, contact your NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

The map data has a mistake or is incomplete (the vehicle icon position is always misaligned in the same area).

Updated road information will be included in the next version of the map data.

Troubleshooting guide 12-5

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(290,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-6 Troubleshooting guide

ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Waypoints are not included in the auto reroute calculation.

Waypoints that have been already passed are not included in the auto reroute calculation.

To go to that waypoint again, edit the route.

Route information is not displayed. Route calculation has not yet been performed. Set the destination and perform route calculation.

The vehicle is not on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.

Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.

Route information is not provided for certain types of roads (roads displayed in gray).

This is not a malfunction.

The auto reroute calculation (or detour calculation) suggests the same route as the one previously suggested.

Route calculations took priority conditions into consideration, but the same route was calculated.

This is not a malfunction.

A waypoint cannot be added. Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones that the vehicle has already passed.

A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set on the route. To go to 6 or more waypoints, perform route calculations multiple times as necessary.

[Calculate] must be selected for route calculation after Waypoints are selected from the Edit/Add to Route screen.

Highlight [Calculate] and push after select-

ing waypoints.

The suggested route is not displayed. Roads near the destination cannot be calculated. Reset the destination to a main or ordinary road, and recalculate the route.

The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.

The starting point and destination are too far away. Divide the trip by selecting one or two intermediate destinations, and perform route calculations multiple times.

There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by time) near the current vehicle location or destination.

Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to off. Setting conditions for route calculation (page 2-65)

A part of the route is not displayed. The suggested route includes narrow streets (roads displayed in gray). This is not a malfunction.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(291,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The part of the route that the vehicle has already passed is deleted.

A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If the vehicle passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting point and the waypoint is deleted (it may not be deleted depending on the area).

This is not a malfunction.

An indirect route is suggested. If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads close to the starting point or destination, the system may suggest an indirect route.

Adjust the location of the starting point or destination.

The system may suggest an indirect route because route calculation does not take into consideration some areas such as narrow streets (gray roads).

Reset the destination to a main or ordinary road, and recalculate the route.

The landmark information does not correspond to the actual information.

This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data. Updated information will be included in the next version of the map data.

The suggested route does not exactly connect to the starting point, waypoints, or destination.

There is no data for route calculation closer to these locations. Set the starting point, waypoints and destination on a main road, and perform route calculation.

Troubleshooting guide 12-7

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(292,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-8 Troubleshooting guide

VOICE GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Voice guidance is not available. Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections marked with . In some cases, voice guidance is not available even when the vehicle should make a turn.

This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route. Go back to the suggested route or request route calculation again.

Voice guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.

Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.

The guidance content does not correspond to the actual condition.

The content of voice guidance may vary, depending on the types of intersections at which turns are made.

Follow all traffic rules and regulations.

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(293,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The traffic information is not displayed.

The traffic information is not set to on. Set the traffic information to on.

The vehicle is in an area where traffic information is not available.

Scroll to an area where traffic information is available.

The subscription to NavTraffic is incomplete, or the sub- scription to NavTraffic has expired.

Check the subscription status of NavTraffic.

The map scale is set at a level where the display of icons is impossible.

Check that the map scale is set at a level in which the display of icons is possible.

Traffic information display and scale levels (page 6-11)

With the automatic detour route search ON, no detour route is set to avoid con- gested areas.

There is no faster route compared to the current route, based on the road network and traffic information.

The automatic detour search is not intended for avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fastest route taking into consideration such things as traffic jams. Follow the current route. Also see NOTES ON TRAFFIC INFORMATION for further information.

The route does not avoid a road section with traffic infor- mation stating that it is closed due to road construction.

The navigation system is designed not to avoid this event because the actual period of closure may differ from the declared roadwork period.

Observe the actual road conditions and follow the instructions on the road for detour when necessary. If the road actually is closed, use the detour function and set the detour distance to avoid the road section that is closed.

Troubleshooting guide 12-9

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(294,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-10 Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than .MP3 (.mp3), .WMA (.wma), .AAC (.aac), .M4A (.m4a), or .AA3 (.aa3) cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song when playing.

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the desired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(295,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. Voicetag (only for stored locations) (page 2-79)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Troubleshooting guide 12-11

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(296,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-12 Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not accept the voice command. or The system accepts the voice command incorrectly.

The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants be quiet.

The volume of the voice is too low. Speak louder.

The volume of the voice is too loud. Speak softer.

Pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.

The voice command is given before the voice recognition system is ready.

Push < > on the steering wheel, and speak a command after the tone

sounds.

8 seconds or more have passed after pushing < > on the

steering wheel.

Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds after the beep tone sounds.

Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for each screen.

Use a correct voice command appropriate for the current screen.

INFO:

For the best recognition, speak appropriate commands. Command lists are available earlier in this manual.

Standard Mode:

Command List (page 8-6)

Alternate Command Mode:

Command List (page 8-19)

VOICE RECOGNITION

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(297,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The image on the display is not clear. Moisture drops such as rain or snow form on the camera lens.

Gently wipe off the drops with soft cloth.

Light such as sunlight or a headlight beam from another vehicle directly enters the camera.

This is not a malfunction. It will return normal when the light disappears.

Moisture condensation occurs in the camera lens due to rapid temperature change.

This is not a malfunction. It will return normal after driving for a short period of time.

Objects on the display may not be clear in a dark place or at night.

Adjust the brightness or the contrast settings of the screen.

The image on the display flickers. The vehicle is under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.

The colors of the object on the display look different from those of the actual object.

This is a typical phenomenon for cameras. This is not a malfunction.

Image does not appear on the display. The shift lever is not shifted to the R (Reverse) position.

Shift the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

Image on the display is not clearly visible. Strong light or reflected light enters the camera. This is not a malfunction.

Troubleshooting guide 12-13

MONITOR SYSTEM

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(298,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

12-14 Troubleshooting guide

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(301,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

13 Index

A

About map data ....................................................... 11-13 About map icons ..................................................... 11-13 About multi function meter....................................... 10-2 About route guidance................................................ 2-48 Acceleration screen ................................................ 10-17 Address book ................................................................ 2-3 Air flow control .............................................................. 5-5 Air recirculation ............................................................. 5-5 Alternate Command Mode ....................................... 8-13 Antenna ......................................................................... 3-11 Audio operation precautions ..................................... 3-2 Audio settings ............................................................... 7-3 Audio system ................................................... 3-2, 12-10 Automatic air intake control ....................................... 5-5 Automatic operation..................................................... 5-3 Automatic reroute ......................................................... 2-4 Automatically display warnings/watches .............. 6-20 Avoid area ...................................................................... 2-3

B

Basics of voice guidance ......................................... 11-8 Before starting.................................................... 8-4, 8-17 BirdviewTM ...................................................................... 2-4 BirdviewTM (3D) map................................................... 2-6 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.... 4-2, 12-11 Bluetooth streaming audio..................................... 3-21 Braking screen ......................................................... 10-19 Building graphics.......................................................... 2-6

C

Camera settings............................................................ 9-7 Car phone or CB radio ............................................. 3-26

CD/DVD/USB device care and cleaning ............. 3-26 Changing map view ................................................... 2-11 Changing scale of map............................................... 2-9 Character (letters and numbers) input screen .... 1-14 Characteristics of liquid crystal display ............. 11-16 Clock settings ............................................................... 7-7 Comfort settings ........................................................... 7-8 Confirming how to use voice commands .... 8-2, 8-14 Connecting procedure ................................................ 4-4 Control buttons ............................................................. 4-4 Control buttons and functions .................................. 1-4 Control panel ................................................................. 1-4 Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) ...... 5-3 Current vehicle location ............................................ 11-2 Custom view screen .................................................. 10-6 Customer assistance ................................................. 12-2

D

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging .................... 5-4 Delete destination ...................................................... 2-43 Delete stored items.................................................... 2-96 Deleting stored item .................................................. 2-86 Destination screen ..................................................... 2-23 Destination weather on suggested route screen ................................................................. 6-19 Detailed Map Coverage Areas (MCA) for navigation system ....................................................... 11-5 Detour.............................................................................. 2-4 Digital media slots ........................................................ 1-7 Directions provided and distances to guide points ................................................................. 11-8 Display adjustment ....................................................... 7-4 Display of current vehicle location ......................... 11-2 Display settings............................................................. 7-4

Display urgent traffic information.............................. 6-9 Displaying current vehicle location .......................... 2-7 Displaying how to operate Voice Recognition System................................................... 8-13 Displaying weather information screen ................. 6-13 Driving record screen ............................................. 10-22 Driving support screen........................................... 10-17 During a call................................................................... 4-7 DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation ..... 3-15

E

Editing address book ................................................ 2-77 End-user terms ........................................................ 11-14 Example of touch panel operation ......................... 1-13

F

Fan speed control ........................................................ 5-5 Features of multi function display system .............. 1-2 Features of this navigation system........................... 2-3 Finding address .......................................................... 2-25 Finding place ............................................................... 2-27 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player................................................................... 3-11 For safe operation ........................................................ 0-2 Fuel economy information .......................................... 6-4 Full screen display...................................................... 7-11 Functions disabled while driving .............................. 0-4

G

Giving voice commands .................................. 8-4, 8-17

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(302,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

13-2

H

Heating (A/C OFF) ...................................................... 5-3 How to handle display ........................................... 11-16 How to input letters and numbers ......................... 1-14 How to order map data updates ......................... 11-13 How to park with predictive course lines .............. 9-5 How to read displayed lines ...................................... 9-3 How to switch display................................................. 9-2 How to switch screens ............................................. 10-5 How to use this manual .............................................. 0-2 How to view screen ..................................................... 5-2 How to view the function meter screen ............... 10-3

I

Image viewer................................................................ 7-10 In-cabin microfilter ........................................................ 5-7 Incorrect display of vehicle position ...................... 11-3 Info on route .................................................................. 6-8 Information screen ........................................................ 6-2 iPod player operation .............................................. 3-24

L

Language and unit settings ....................................... 7-8 Language settings ........................................................ 7-8 Laser product ................................................................ 0-5 List screen .................................................................... 1-12 Looking at information on map ............................... 2-17

M

Maintenance information............................................. 6-6 Maintenance of display .......................................... 11-17 Making a call.................................................................. 4-6 Manual operation .......................................................... 5-5

Map data.................................................................... 11-13 Map menu screen ...................................................... 2-19 Map settings .................................................................. 2-5 Map symbols ............................................................... 2-22 Map types....................................................................... 2-5 Map update .................................................................. 6-21 Map view settings ...................................................... 2-13 Menu screen and how to operate.......................... 1-10 Moving map ................................................................... 2-7 Multi function meter ..................................................... 1-2 Multi function meter list ............................................ 10-2

N

Navigation ..................................................................... 12-3 Navigation setting ....................................................... 2-91 Navigation system ........................................................ 1-2 Nearby traffic info. ........................................................ 6-9 NISSAN Voice Recognition ....................................... 8-2 Notes on NavTraffic information .......................... 11-11 Notes on NavWeatherXM information ............... 11-12 Notes on voice guidance ...................................... 11-10 Number input screen ................................................. 1-15

O

Other navigation settings ......................................... 2-92 Outside air circulation ................................................. 5-5

P

Performance and vehicle information panel......... 10-9 Phone selection ............................................................ 4-4 Phone setting ................................................................ 4-7 Places of interest (places) directory........................ 2-3 Procedures after setting destination ..................... 2-44

Q

Quick Dial ....................................................................... 4-5

R

RearView monitor ......................................................... 9-2 Rear-Wide View monitor ............................................ 9-2 Receiving a call ............................................................. 4-7 Reference symbols....................................................... 0-2 Regulatory information ................................................ 4-3 Repeating voice guidance..................................... 11-10 Reset all navigation settings to default ................. 2-96 Route calculation ........................................................ 11-6 Route calculation and visual guidance ................. 12-6 Route guidance...................................... 2-3, 2-44, 11-8 Route guidance settings........................................... 2-67 Route screen ............................................................... 2-53

S

Safety information......................................................... 0-2 Safety notes ................................................................. 10-2 Searching from address book................................. 2-33 Selecting panel ........................................................... 10-6 Servicing air conditioner ............................................. 5-7 Setting alternate command mode .......................... 8-22 Setting by phone number......................................... 2-37 Setting city center ...................................................... 2-41 Setting color theme ..................................................... 7-5 Setting destination ..................................................... 2-23 Setting freeway entrance/exit .................................. 2-38 Setting from stored routes ....................................... 2-36 Setting home as destination .................................... 2-32 Setting intersection .................................................... 2-39 Setting point on map................................................. 2-42 Setting previous destination .................................... 2-34

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(303,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

Setting previous start point ..................................... 2-35 Setting the image viewer.......................................... 7-11 Settings screen ............................................................. 7-2 Speaker adaptation .................................................... 8-22 Speed limit indication on map ................................ 2-92 Standard mode ............................................................. 8-2 Start-up screen ............................................................. 1-9 Status screen ................................................................ 6-2 Steering screen........................................................ 10-20 Steering switch ............................................................. 1-8 Stopwatch screen ................................................... 10-22 Storing a location/route ............................................ 2-70 Storing avoid area ...................................................... 2-75 Storing location ........................................................... 2-70 Storing route ................................................................ 2-73 Storing tracked route ................................................ 2-74 System feedback announcement modes ............. 8-22

T

Tire pressure information ............................................ 6-4 To turn the system OFF.............................................. 5-6 Touch panel operation............................................... 1-13 Trademarks ..................................................................... 0-5 Traffic information ....................................................... 12-9 Traffic information on map........................................ 6-10 Traffic information settings ....................................... 6-11 Transferring information to/from address book .... 2-89

U

Unit settings ................................................................... 7-9 Unit settings (Tire Pressure) ................................... 7-10 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port....... 3-17 Using Voice Recognition System .................. 8-4, 8-17

V

Vehicle icon.................................................................. 12-4 Vehicle information screen ......................................... 6-4 Ventilators ....................................................................... 5-6 Viewing available traffic information......................... 6-7 Viewing available weather information .................. 6-12 Viewing GPS current location information........... 6-22 Viewing information about current vehicle location ............................................................. 6-3 Viewing navigation system version information .... 6-22 Voice command examples............................... 8-9, 8-24 Voice commands .......................................................... 4-3 Voice guidance .................................................. 2-4, 12-8 Voice recognition ..................................................... 12-12 Volume adjustment ....................................................... 7-6

W

What is GPS (Global Positioning System)? ....... 11-2 When gray road is displayed on map................... 11-6

X

XM NavTraffic information ........................................ 2-3

13-3

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(304,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 8 Model: R35-N ]

13-4

MEMO

Condition: Language=NAM_English/

(4,1)

[ Edit: 2014/ 12/ 5 Model: R35-N ]

NISSAN NAVIGATION SYSTEM HELPDESK CONTACT INFORMA- TION For assistance or inquiries about the NISSAN Navigation System, or to order updated map data, contact the NISSAN NAVIGATION SYS- TEM HELPDESK at:

. ADDRESS: P.O. Box 1588, Orem, UT

84059-992

. WEB SITE: www.NissanNavigation.com or

www.nissan.ca

. PHONE: 1-888-661-9995

. HOURS: 6:00 AM to 5:00 PM

(Pacific Time)

NISSAN CONSUMER AFFAIRS DE- PARTMENT For assistance or inquiries about the NISSAN warranty, service or general questions, contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

1-800-387-0122

Thank you for purchasing a NISSAN vehicle.

This users manual is for the multi function display system only. This manual contains operating instructions for the NISSAN Multi Function Display System offered in your NISSAN vehicle.

Please read this manual carefully to ensure safe operation of the navigation system.

. Because of possible specification changes and optional equipment, sections of this manual may not apply to your vehicle.

. All information, specifications and illustra- tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

. Do not remove this manual from the vehicle when selling this vehicle. The next user of this multi function display system may need the manual.

FOREWORD

Condition: Language=NAM_English/ 1849817-EN_GTR_Navi-cover.indd 2 12/17/14 11:12 AM

2016 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY

OWNERS MANUAL

2 0 1 6 N

IS S

A N

G T -R

M U

L T I F

U N

C T IO

N D

IS P

L A

Y

R 3 5 -N

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle

R35-N

Printing: December 2014 (19) Publication No.:

Printed In U.S.A. NA16E 0R35U0

1849817-

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GT-R Nissan works, you can view and download the Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Nissan GT-R as well as other Nissan manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Nissan GT-R. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Nissan GT-R v8 Owner's Manual v2 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.